Lowrance electronic GPS Receiver 10519001 User Manual

Pub. 988-0152-181

www.lowrance.com

LMS-522c iGPS &

LMS-527cDF iGPS

Fish-finding Sonar & Mapping GPS

Installation and Operation

Instructions

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table of Contents

Section 1: Read Me First!......................................................... 1

Specifications: LMS-522c iGPS and LMS-527cDF iGPS ............. 3

How to use this manual: typographical conventions................ 10

Section 2: Installation............................................................. 13

Preparations ................................................................................ 13

Transducer Installation.............................................................. 13

Single-frequency transom installations............................. 14

Dual-frequency transom installations ............................... 14

Single-frequency trolling motor installations ................... 14

Shoot-through hull installations ........................................ 14

Selecting a Transducer Location............................................ 14

How low should you go? .......................................................... 15

Shoot-thru-hull vs. Transom Mounting................................. 16

Transom Transducer Assembly And Mounting .................... 17

Trolling Motor Bracket Installation (single-frequency only) 23

Transducer Orientation and Fish Arches.............................. 23

Shoot-Thru-Hull Preparation................................................. 24

Hulls With Flotation Materials.......................................... 24

Testing Determines Best Location......................................... 25

Shoot-thru-hull Installation ................................................... 27

Speed/Temperature Sensors................................................. 28

Optional Speed Sensor Installation ....................................... 28

Power Connections...................................................................... 30

Powering Your Display Unit ...................................................... 31

Power Diagram A ........................................................................ 32

Power Diagram B ........................................................................ 33

Powering a NMEA 2000 Network Bus ...................................... 33

Connecting to a NMEA 2000 Network .................................. 34

NMEA 0183 Wiring (Data cable) ........................................... 34

Mounting the Unit: Bracket or Portable ................................... 35

MMC or SD Card Memory Card Installation............................ 39

Other Accessories........................................................................ 40

Cleaning Towel........................................................................ 40

Face Cover ................................................................................... 41

Section 3: Basic Sonar Operation........................................ 43

Keyboard...................................................................................... 43

Power/lights on and off ............................................................... 44

Main Menu................................................................................... 44

Pages ............................................................................................ 46

Satellite Status Page............................................................... 46

Navigation Page ...................................................................... 47

Map Page ................................................................................. 47

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Sonar Page............................................................................... 48

Basic Sonar Quick Reference............................................... 51

Sonar Operations ........................................................................ 52

Fish Symbols vs. Full Sonar Chart ........................................ 54

Other Free Training Aids ....................................................... 55

Section 4: Sonar Options........................................................ 57

ASP™ (Advanced Signal Processing)......................................... 57

Alarms.......................................................................................... 58

Depth Alarms .......................................................................... 58

Zone Alarm .............................................................................. 59

Fish Alarm............................................................................... 60

GPS Alarms ............................................................................. 61

NMEA 2000 Alarms.................................................................... 62

Calibrate Speed ........................................................................... 63

Chart Speed................................................................................. 64

Colorline™ ................................................................................... 65

Depth Cursor ............................................................................... 66

Depth Range - Automatic ........................................................... 67

Depth Range - Manual................................................................ 67

Depth Range - Upper and Lower Limits ................................... 68

FasTrack™................................................................................... 69

Fish I.D.™ (Fish Symbols & Depths)......................................... 70

FishTrack™.................................................................................. 72

Frequency (Change Frequency) (LMS-527cDF only)................ 72

HyperScroll™............................................................................... 73

Log Sonar Chart Data................................................................. 74

Noise Rejection............................................................................ 75

Overlay Data ............................................................................... 75

Ping Speed & HyperScroll™....................................................... 78

Reset Options............................................................................... 79

Reset Water Distance.................................................................. 80

Set Keel Offset............................................................................. 80

Sensitivity & Auto Sensitivity.................................................... 81

Automatic Sensitivity ............................................................. 82

Sonar Chart Mode....................................................................... 83

Sonar Page & Sonar Chart Display Options............................. 84

Full Sonar Chart ..................................................................... 84

Split Zoom Sonar Chart .......................................................... 85

Split Frequency Sonar Chart (LMS-527cDF only)................ 85

Digital Data/Chart .................................................................. 86

Customize Page Displays........................................................ 86

Flasher ..................................................................................... 88

Sonar with Custom Gauges........................................................ 88

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Sonar Simulator .......................................................................... 91

Stop Chart.................................................................................... 93

Surface Clarity ............................................................................ 94

Transparency............................................................................... 95

Upper and Lower Limits............................................................. 96

Zoom & Zoom Bar........................................................................ 96

Zoom Pan ..................................................................................... 96

Section 5: Sonar Troubleshooting ....................................... 97

Section 6: Basic GPS Operations ....................................... 101

Keyboard.................................................................................... 101

Power/lights on and off ............................................................. 102

Main Menu................................................................................. 102

Pages .......................................................................................... 104

Sonar Page............................................................................. 104

Satellite Status Page............................................................. 104

Navigation Page .................................................................... 106

Map Page ............................................................................... 109

Background map vs. MapCreate map content .................... 110

Map with Sonar..................................................................... 113

Map with Custom Gauges..................................................... 114

Radar.......................................................................................... 115

Basic GPS Quick Reference................................................ 117

Find Your Current Position...................................................... 118

Moving Around the Map: Zoom & Cursor Arrow Keys........... 118

Selecting Any Map Item With the Cursor............................... 119

Searching ................................................................................... 119

Set a Waypoint .......................................................................... 121

Navigate To a Waypoint ........................................................... 123

Set Man Overboard (MOB) Waypoint...................................... 123

Navigate Back to MOB Waypoint............................................ 124

Navigate to Cursor Position on Map........................................ 124

Navigate to a Point of Interest................................................. 126

Creating and Saving a Trail..................................................... 126

Displaying a Saved Trail .......................................................... 128

Navigating Trails ...................................................................... 129

Visual Trailing....................................................................... 129

Navigate a Trail (forward).................................................... 129

Navigate a Back Trail (backtrack, or reverse) .................... 131

Transfer Custom Maps and GPS Data Files........................... 132

Custom Maps:........................................................................ 132

GPS Data files: ...................................................................... 132

Cancel Navigation..................................................................... 134

Section 7: Advanced GPS Operations.............................. 135

iii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Find Distance from different Locations................................... 135

Find Distance from Point to Point ........................................... 135

Icons ........................................................................................... 136

Create Icon on Map ............................................................... 136

Create Icon at Current Position........................................... 136

Delete an Icon........................................................................ 136

Navigate to an Icon ............................................................... 137

Routes ........................................................................................ 137

Create and Save a Route ...................................................... 138

Delete a Route ....................................................................... 140

Edit a Route Name................................................................ 141

Edit Route Waypoints........................................................... 141

Navigate a Route................................................................... 142

Navigate a Route in Reverse ................................................ 142

Trails.......................................................................................... 143

Delete a Trail......................................................................... 143

Edit a Trail Name ................................................................. 144

Edit a Trail Color .................................................................. 144

Edit a Trail Pattern............................................................... 144

Utilities ...................................................................................... 145

Alarm Clock ........................................................................... 145

Sun/Moon Rise & Set Calculator.......................................... 145

Trip Calculator ...................................................................... 145

Trip Down Timer................................................................... 145

Trip Up Timer........................................................................ 145

Waypoints .................................................................................. 145

Delete a Waypoint................................................................. 145

Edit a Waypoint..................................................................... 146

Selecting a Waypoint ............................................................ 147

Set a Waypoint by Average Position.................................... 148

Set a Waypoint by Projecting a Position.............................. 148

Section 8: System & GPS Setup Options.......................... 149

Alarms........................................................................................ 149

Auto Satellite Search ................................................................ 150

Check MMC Files and Storage Space...................................... 151

Communications Port Configuration....................................... 151

Configure NMEA....................................................................... 152

Coordinate System Selection.................................................... 152

Map Fix...................................................................................... 154

Customize Page Displays.......................................................... 155

GPS Simulator........................................................................... 156

Hide GPS Feature ..................................................................... 158

Initialize GPS ............................................................................ 158

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Map Auto Zoom ......................................................................... 159

Map Data ................................................................................... 159

Map Datum Selection................................................................ 161

Map Detail Category Selection................................................. 162

Map Orientation........................................................................ 162

NauticPath™ USA Marine Charts........................................... 164

Nautical Chart Notes............................................................ 164

Port Information.................................................................... 165

Tidal Current Information.................................................... 166

Tide Information ................................................................... 168

Navionics^®Charts..................................................................... 169

Overlay Data ............................................................................. 170

Pop-up Help ............................................................................... 174

Reset Options............................................................................. 175

Screen Contrast and Brightness .............................................. 176

Set Language............................................................................. 177

Set Local Time........................................................................... 177

Show WAAS Alarm ................................................................... 178

Software Version Information.................................................. 179

Sounds and Alarm Sound Styles.............................................. 180

Track Smoothing ....................................................................... 181

Trail Options.............................................................................. 181

Transparency............................................................................. 184

Units of Measure....................................................................... 185

Section 9: Searching.............................................................. 189

Find Streets ............................................................................... 190

Find Any Item Selected by Map Cursor .................................. 191

Find Interstate Highway Exits ................................................ 191

Find Map Places or Points of Interest (POI) ........................... 194

Find Streets or Intersections.................................................... 196

Find a Street.......................................................................... 196

Find an Intersection.............................................................. 197

Find Waypoints ......................................................................... 199

Section 10: NMEA 2000 ......................................................... 203

NMEA 2000 Menu..................................................................... 203

Internal GPS Receiver .............................................................. 203

To switch from internal GPS to LGC module.................. 203

Bus Setup................................................................................... 204

Engine & Tank Configuration.................................................. 205

Tank Select ........................................................................ 206

Tank Size ........................................................................... 206

Set Configuration button .................................................. 206

Device Configuration Menu.................................................. 207

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Device Information and Device Data................................... 207

Fuel Management Menu........................................................... 208

Tank Location.................................................................... 208

Fuel Added......................................................................... 208

Add Fuel............................................................................. 209

Fill Tank............................................................................. 209

Adding Fuel to Tank ............................................................. 209

Engine Operations................................................................. 209

Engine Select ..................................................................... 209

NMEA 2000 Alarms.................................................................. 210

Waypoint Sharing ..................................................................... 211

Backlight Synchronization ....................................................... 211

Configuring EP Sensors............................................................ 212

EP-35 Temperature Configuration ...................................... 212

Advanced Options menu....................................................... 213

Instance.............................................................................. 213

Restore Defaults................................................................ 213

To restore default settings................................................ 213

EP-10 Fuel Flow Configuration............................................ 213

Advanced Options menu....................................................... 214

Instance.............................................................................. 214

Restore Defaults................................................................ 214

EP-15 Fluid Level Configuration ......................................... 215

To input Device Name:...................................................... 215

To select Tank Instance (Location): ................................. 215

To select Fluid Type: ......................................................... 216

To input Tank Size: ........................................................... 216

Advanced Options menu....................................................... 217

Instance.............................................................................. 217

Restore Defaults................................................................ 217

To restore default settings:............................................... 217

Suzuki Engine Interface Configuration............................... 218

Advanced Options menu....................................................... 219

Instance.............................................................................. 219

Restore Defaults................................................................ 219

To restore default settings:............................................... 219

Calibrating EP Sensors............................................................. 220

EP-10 Fuel Flow Calibration................................................ 220

To check fuel flow accuracy:.............................................. 220

To calibrate an EP-10 Fuel Flow:..................................... 221

To Reset Calibration: ........................................................ 221

EP-15 Fluid Level Calibration ............................................. 221

2-Point Calibration............................................................ 221

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3-Point Calibration............................................................ 222

5-Point Calibration............................................................ 223

Engine Trim Calibration....................................................... 225

Reset Trim Calibration ......................................................... 226

Bennett Trim Tabs Calibration............................................ 226

To calibrate Trim Tabs:..................................................... 226

To Reset Calibration: ........................................................ 227

Section 11: Supplemental Material ................................... 229

vii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

NOTICE!

The storage and operation temperature range for your unit is from -20

degrees to +167 degrees Fahrenheit (-28 degrees to +75 degrees Cel-

sius). Extended storage or operation in temperatures higher or lower

than specified will damage the liquid crystal display in your unit. This

type of damage is not covered by the warranty. For more information,

contact the factory's Customer Service Department; phone numbers are

listed on the last page of the manual.

WARNING!

A CAREFUL NAVIGATOR NEVER RELIES ON ONLY ONE METHOD

TO OBTAIN POSITION INFORMATION.

CAUTION

When showing navigation data to a position (waypoint), a GPS unit will show

the shortest, most direct path to the waypoint. It provides navigation data to the

waypoint regardless of obstructions. Therefore, the prudent navigator will not

only take advantage of all available navigation tools when traveling to a way-

point, but will also visually check to make sure a clear, safe path to the waypoint

is always available.

WARNING!

When a GPS unit is used in a vehicle, the vehicle operator is solely re-

sponsible for operating the vehicle in a safe manner. Vehicle operators

must maintain full surveillance of all pertinent driving, boating or flying

conditions at all times. An accident or collision resulting in damage to

property, personal injury or death could occur if the operator of a GPS-

equipped vehicle fails to pay full attention to travel conditions and vehi-

cle operation while the vehicle is in motion.

viii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Section 1: Read Me First!

How this manual can get you out on the road, fast!

Welcome to the exciting world of digital sonar and GPS! We know

you're anxious to begin navigating and finding fish, but we have a favor

to ask. Before you grab the unit and begin installing it, please give us a

moment or two to explain how our manual can help you get the best

performance from your compact, wide-screen, combination fish finder

and mapping GPS receiver.

First, we want to thank you for buying a Lowrance sonar/GPS unit.

Whether you're a first time user or a professional fisherman, you'll dis-

cover that your unit is easy to use, yet capable of handling demanding

navigation and sonar tasks. When you team your unit with our custom

mapping software MapCreate™ 6, you have an incredible combination.

You won't find another combination GPS and sonar unit with this

much power and this many features for this price!

Our goal for this book is to get you on the water fast, with a minimum

of fuss. Like you, we'd rather spend more time boating or fishing and

less time reading the manual!

So, we designed our book so that you don't have to read the whole thing

from front to back for the information you want. At the start (or end) of

each segment, we'll tell you what content is coming up next. If it's a

concept you're already familiar with, we'll show you how and where to

skip ahead for the next important topic. We've also made it easy to look

up any tips you may need from time to time. Here's how:

The manual is organized into 10 sections. This first section is an intro-

duction to the LMS-522c iGPS and LMS-527cDF iGPS. It tells you the

basics you need to know before you can make the unit look around and

tell you where you are, or look below the surface to find some fish.

Section 2 will help you install your unit, the transducer and the GPS

antenna module. We'll show you how to get the MultiMedia Card

(MMC) correctly installed inside the unit. We'll also tell you about some

of the available accessories.

Section 3 covers Basic Sonar Operation. It will show you how easy it is

to run your sonar, right out of the box. This section features a one-page

Sonar Quick Reference. (If you've already jumped ahead and fig-

ured out how to install the unit yourself, and you just can't wait

any longer, turn to the Quick Reference on page 51 and head

for the water!)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

After you have gained some experience with your sonar, you'll want to

check out Section 4, which discusses more advanced Sonar Options and

Other Features.

When you come to a sonar menu command on your unit’s screen, you can

look it up in the manual by skimming over the table of contents, just flip-

ping through Section 3 or scanning through the sonar options in Section 4.

If you're having difficulty with your sonar, you can find an answer to

the most common problems in Section 5, Sonar Troubleshooting.

The manual switches from sonar to navigation in Section 6, which in-

troduces you to Basic GPS Operations. This section features a one-

page GPS Quick Reference on page 117.

Section 6 contains short, easy-to-scan GPS lessons that follow one an-

other in chronological order. They're all you'll need to know to find your

way on the water quickly.

After you've learned the basics (or if you already have some GPS ex-

perience), you may want to try out some of the unit’s many advanced

navigation features. That brings us to Section 7, Advanced GPS Opera-

tions. This section contains the rest of your unit’s GPS command func-

tions.

When you come to a GPS menu command on the screen, you can look it

up in the manual by skimming over the table of contents, flipping

through Section 6 or scanning the command portion of Section 7.

Your unit is ready to use right out of the box, but you can fine tune and

customize it's operation with dozens of options. Since sonar is the unit's

key feature, we put the main sonar options in Section 4. Some options,

such as screen brightness settings, affect both sonar and GPS opera-

tions. We describe how to use those common options along with GPS

options in Section 8, System Setup and GPS Setup Options.

In Section 9, we go into more detail on one of the unit’s most remarkable

GPS capabilities — Searching. We'll introduce a search example in the

Basic GPS Operation section, but there are so many map items you can

search for, we had to give this function it's own section in the manual! For

example, did you know your unit can look up business phone numbers,

functioning as a virtual Yellow Pages? We’ll show you how in Section 9.

Finally, in Section 10, we offer Supplemental Material, including a list

of the GPS datums used, warranties and customer service information.

Now, if you're into the fine details, glance over the next segment on speci-

fications to see just how much sonar and GPS power your unit contains.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

It's important to us (and our power users), but, if you don't care how

many watts of power the unit has, or how many waypoints the your unit

can store, skip ahead to important information on how the sonar works,

on page 5. (Background on GPS begins on page 6.)

Specifications: LMS-522c iGPS and LMS-527cDF iGPS

General

Display: ............................5.0" (12.7 cm) diagonal high contrast color

Film SuperTwist LCD; programmable to

viewing preference.

Resolution: ......................480 pixel x 480 pixel resolution; 230,400 to-

tal pixels.

Backlighting: ..................Incandescent backlit screen with multiple

lighting levels; backlit keypad.

Input power: ...................10 to 15 volts DC.

Case size: .........................5.4" H x 6.9" W x 3.4" D (13.8 x 17.6 x 8.6

cm); sealed and waterproof; suitable for salt-

water use.

MMC slots:.......................One with waterproof door (SD card compati-

ble).

Recording:........................ GPS uses MMC & SD cards for recording trip

details and displaying charts or custom maps.

Sonar uses them to record and save sonar

chart logs.

Back-up memory:...........Built-in memory stores sonar records and

GPS data for decades. User settings are

stored when unit is turned off.

Languages: ......................10; menu languages selectable by user.

Sonar

Frequency: ......................LMS-527cDF: 50/200 kHz.

LMS-522c: 200 kHz.

Transducers: .....................A dual-frequency Skimmer^®transducer with

built-in temperature sensor is packed with the

LMS-527cDF. It has 35°/12° cone angles. A

single-frequency Skimmer transducer with

built-in temperature sensor is packed with the

LMS-522c. It has a 20° cone angle. Transduc-

ers operate at speeds up to 70 mph (61 kts).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Transmitter:....................3,000 watts peak-to-peak/375 watts RMS.

Sonar sounding

depth capability:............LMS-527cDF: 2,500 feet/762 meters.

LMS-522c: 1,000 feet/305 meters.

(Actual capability depends on transducer

configuration and installation, bottom com-

position and water conditions. All sonar

units typically read deeper in fresh water

than in salt water.)

Depth display: ................Continuous display.

Graph recording:...........Up to 1 GB on one MMC (or SD) card

Audible alarms:..............Deep/shallow/fish/zone.

Automatic ranging:.......Yes, with instant screen updates.

Auto bottom track:........Yes

Zoom bottom track:.......Yes.

Split-screen zoom:.........Yes.

Surface water temp: .....Yes, built into transducer.

Speed/distance log: .......Yes, with optional speed sensor (sensor in-

cluded with LMS-527cDF.)

GPS

Receiver/antenna:............Internal; Built in 12 parallel channel NMEA

2000-ready GPS/WAAS receiver/antenna.

Background map: ..........Built-in custom, detailed Lowrance map.

Contains: enhanced detail of continental U.S.

and Hawaii. Includes more than 60,000 nav

aids and 10,000 wrecks/obstructions in

coastal and Great Lakes waters. Metro ar-

eas, selected major streets/highways and in-

terstate exit services details included.

Custom mapping:...........MapCreate^™6 software optional; optional

plug and play LEI FreedomMaps™ offer the

same high-detail without the computer work

of MapCreate. Other plug and play mapping

options include IMS™ Fishing Hot Spots^®,

LEI NauticPaths™ charts and Navionics^®

charts.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Mapping memory: ...........Up to 1 GB on one MMC (or SD) card.

Position updates:...........Every second.

Position points:..............1,000 waypoints; 1,000 event marker icons.

Audible alarms:..............Arrival/off-course/anchor.

Graphic symbols for

waypoints or event

marker icons:..................42.

Routes: .............................100; up to 100 waypoints per route.

Plot Trails:.......................10 savable; up to 9,999 points per trail.

Zoom range: ....................39 ranges; 0.02 to 4,000 miles.

NOTE:

The above memory capacities refer only the unit’s on-board memory.

The amount of GPS or sonar data you can record and save for recall

later is only limited by the number of MMC cards you have.

NOTICE!

The storage temperature range for your unit is from -4 degrees to +167

degrees Fahrenheit (-20 degrees to +75 degrees Celsius). Extended stor-

age in temperatures higher or lower than specified will damage the liq-

uid crystal display in your unit. This type of damage is not covered by

the warranty. For more information, contact the factory's Customer

Service Department; phone numbers are listed on the last page.

How Lowrance Sonar Works

Sonar has been around since the 1940s, so if you already know how it

works, skip down to read about the relatively new technology of GPS.

But, if you've never owned a sonar fish finder, this segment will tell you

the under water basics.

Sonar is an abbreviation for SOund NAvigation and Ranging, a technol-

ogy developed during World War II for tracking enemy submarines.

(Lowrance developed the world's first transistorized sportfishing sonar in

1957.) A sonar consists of a transmitter, transducer, receiver and dis-

play. In simple terms, here's how it finds the bottom, or the fish:

The transmitter emits an electrical impulse, which the transducer con-

verts into a sound wave and sends into the water. (The sound frequency

can't be heard by humans or fish.) The sound wave strikes an object

(fish, structure, bottom) and bounces back to the transducer, which

converts the sound back into an electrical signal.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The receiver amplifies this return signal, or echo, and sends it to the

display, where an image of the object appears on the scrolling sonar

chart. The sonar's microprocessor calculates the time lapse between the

transmitted signal and echo return to determine the distance to the

object. The whole process repeats itself several times each second.

Your unit can record a log of the sonar signals that scroll across the

screen and save them to the MMC memory card. (These recordings are

also called sonar charts or sonar graphs.) You can replay this sonar log

in the unit using the Sonar Simulator function, or play it back on a per-

sonal computer using our free Sonar Viewer. The viewer is available for

download from the Lowrance web site, www.lowrance.com.

You can save several different sonar log files, erase 'em and record new

ones, over and over again. The size of your sonar recordings is only lim-

ited by the free space available on your MMC.

How Lowrance GPS Works

You'll navigate faster and easier if you understand how your unit scans

the sky to tell you where you are on the earth — and, where you're go-

ing. (But if you already have a working understanding of GPS receivers

and the GPS navigation system, skip ahead to Section 2, Installation &

Accessories on page 13. If you're new to GPS, read on, and you can later

impress your friends with your new-found knowledge.)

First, think of your unit as a small but powerful computer. (But don't

worry — we made the unit easy to use, so you don't need to be a com-

puter expert to find your way!) It includes a keypad and a screen with

menus so you can tell it what to do. The screen also lets the unit show

your location on a moving map, as well as point the way to your desti-

nation.

This gimbal-mounted unit uses an external antenna/receiver module,

which makes the whole system work something like your car radio. But

instead of your favorite dance tunes, this receiver tunes in to a couple

of dozen GPS satellites circling the earth. (It will also listen in to the

WAAS satellites in orbit, but more about that in the upcoming segment

introducing you to GPS and WAAS.)

Your unit listens to signals from as many satellites as it can "see"

above the horizon, eliminates the weakest signals, then computes its

location in relation to those satellites. Once the unit figures its latitude

and longitude, it plots that position on the moving map shown on the

screen. The whole process takes place several times a second!

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The performance doesn't stop there. Stored in the permanent memory

of each unit is a basic background map of the entire world. We lock it in

here at the factory — you can't change or erase this map.

The background map is suitable for many navigation chores, but for

maximum accuracy and much more detail, you need our optional map-

making software, MapCreate™ 6. Some unit features — such as search-

ing for businesses and addresses — won't work without a custom Map-

Create map. There is so much detail in our background map (and even

more in MapCreate) that we'll describe their contents and differences

in Section 6, Basic GPS Operations, on page 101.

Another portion of the unit’s onboard memory is devoted to recording

GPS navigation information, which includes waypoints, event marker

icons, trails and routes. This lets you look back the way you came.

Think of this data storage like the hard drive memory in a computer or

a tape in a cassette tape recorder. You can save several different GPS

data files, erase 'em and record new ones, over and over again.

Your unit has one more thing in common with a personal computer.

Just as computers have a floppy disk drive for storing and exchanging

files, the unit has a slot for an MMC (MultiMedia Card) or SDC (Secure

Digital card) flash memory card. These solid-state memory devices are

about the size of a postage stamp, but can hold data ranging from 8 MB

to 1 GB. (Compare that to a floppy disk's 1.44 MB capacity!) Your unit

uses all that MMC space for two key GPS purposes. (The MMC is also

used to record sonar logs.)

First, you can backup your onboard GPS Data Files by copying them to

the MMC. Since the MMC is removable (like a floppy disk or a cassette

tape), you can store these GPS Data Files on a personal computer

equipped with an MMC card reader. (Or store them on a pocketful of

MMCs, if you don't have a computer.) Our MapCreate mapping software

can save, edit or create its own GPS Data Files, which can be copied to

the MMC and then loaded from the MMC into unit’s memory. (NOTE:

No matter where they come from, GPS Data Files must be loaded from

the MMC into memory before your unit can use them.)

The other key GPS use for MMCs is storage of special high-detail, cus-

tom maps, which you can produce on your computer with our MapCre-

ate software. These MapCreate custom maps contain much greater de-

tail than the basic background map. These Custom Map Files (file

format *.lcm) not only may be shared between the LMS-522c and

527cDF, but also with other Lowrance GPS and sonar/GPS units as

well as personal computers. (For example, the exact same MMC, cus-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

tom map files and GPS data files can be used interchangeably between

your gimbal-mounted unit and the hand-held iFINDER™ GPS re-

ceiver.)

Your unit automatically reads Custom Map Files directly from the

MMC or SDC. To use a custom map, all you need to do is slide an MMC

containing a map into the unit.

Introduction to GPS and WAAS

Well, now you know the basics of how your unit does its work. You

might be ready to jump ahead to Section 2, Installation & Accessories,

on page 13, so you can mount your unit and plug in the power. Or you

might want to see how our text formatting makes the manual tutorials

easy to skim. If that's the case, move on to "How to Use This Manual"

on page 10. But, if you want to understand the current state of satellite

navigation, look over this segment describing how GPS and its new

companion WAAS work together to get you where you're going.

The Global Positioning System (GPS) was launched July 17, 1995 by

the United States Department of Defense. It was designed as a 24-

hour-a-day, 365-days-a-year, all weather global navigation system for

the armed forces of the U.S. and its allies. Civilian use was also avail-

able at first, but it was less accurate because the military scrambled

the signal somewhat, using a process called Selective Availability (SA.)

GPS proved so useful for civilian navigation that the federal govern-

ment discontinued SA on May 2, 2000, after the military developed

other methods to deny GPS service to enemy forces. Reliable accuracy

for civilian users jumped from 100 meters (330 feet) under SA to the

present level of 10 to 20 meters (about 30 to 60 feet.)

Twenty-four satellites orbit 10,900 nautical miles above the Earth, pass-

ing overhead twice daily. A series of ground stations (with precisely sur-

veyed locations) controls the satellites and monitors their exact locations

in the sky. Each satellite broadcasts a low-power signal that identifies

the satellite and its position above the earth. Three of these satellites are

spares, unused until needed. The rest virtually guarantee that at least

four satellites are in view nearly anywhere on Earth at all times.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

A minimum of three satellites are required to determine a 2D fix.

The system requires signal reception from three satellites in order to

determine a position. This is called a 2D fix. It takes four satellites to

determine both position and elevation (your height above sea level —

also called altitude.) This is called a 3D fix.

Remember, the unit must have a clear view of the satellites in order to

receive their signals. Unlike radio or television signals, GPS works at

very high frequencies. These signals can be easily blocked by trees,

buildings, an automobile roof, even your body.

Like most GPS receivers, the unit doesn’t have a compass or any other

navigation aid built inside. It relies solely on the signals from the satel-

lites to calculate a position. Speed, direction of travel, and distance are

all calculated from position information. Therefore, in order it to de-

termine direction of travel, you must be moving and the faster, the bet-

ter. This is not to say that it won’t work at walking or trolling speeds —

it will. There will simply be more "wandering" of the data shown on the

display.

GPS alone is plenty accurate for route navigation, but the U.S. Federal

Aviation Administration has special aircraft navigation needs that go

beyond basic GPS. So, the FAA has developed a program to boost GPS

performance with its Wide Area Augmentation System, or WAAS. The

FAA commissioned the system on July 11, 2003.

WAAS is designed to increase GPS accuracy to within 7.6 meters vertically

and horizontally, but it consistently delivers accuracies within 1-2 meters

horizontal and 2-3 meters vertical, according to the FAA. It does this by

broadcasting correction signals on GPS frequencies. Your unit automati-

cally receives both GPS and WAAS signals.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

However, there are some fringe areas of the U.S., including parts of

Alaska, that do not yet receive robust WAAS coverage. Continued WAAS

development is planned to extend WAAS coverage in the years to come.

WAAS boosts the accuracy of land GPS navigation, but the system is

designed for aircraft. The satellites are in a fixed orbit around the

Equator, so they appear very low in the sky to someone on the ground

in North America. Aircraft and vessels on open water can get consis-

tently good WAAS reception, but terrain, foliage or even large man-made

structures can sometimes block the WAAS signal from ground receivers.

You'll find that using your GPS receiver is both easy and amazingly

accurate. It’s easily the most accurate method of electronic navigation

available to the general public today. Remember, however, that this

receiver is only a tool. Always have another method of navigation avail-

able, such as a map or chart and a compass.

Also remember that this unit will always show navigation information

in the shortest line from your present position to a waypoint, regardless

of terrain! It only calculates position, it can’t know what’s between you

and your destination, for example. It’s up to you to safely navigate

around obstacles, no matter how you’re using this product.

How to use this manual: typographical conventions

Many instructions are listed as numbered steps. The keypad and arrow

"keystrokes" appear as boldface type. So, if you're in a real hurry (or

just need a reminder), you can skim the instructions and pick out what

menu command to use by finding the boldface command text. The fol-

lowing paragraphs explain how to interpret the text formatting for

those commands and other instructions:

Arrow Keys

The arrow keys control the movement of dotted crosshairs lines on your

mapping screen called the cursor. The arrow keys also control a hori-

zontal line depth cursor on the sonar screen. The arrow keys help you

move around the menus so you can execute different commands. They

are represented by symbols like these, which denote the down arrow

key, the up arrow, the left arrow and the right arrow: ↓ ↑ ← →.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Keyboard

The other keys perform a variety of functions. When the text refers to a

key to press, the key is shown in bold, sans serif type. For example, the

"Enter/Icons" key is shown as ENT and the "Menu" key is shown as MENU.

Menu Commands

A menu command or a menu option will appear in small capital letters, in

a bold sans serif type like this: ROUTE PLANNING. These indicate that you

are to select this command or option from a menu or take an action of

some kind with the menu item. Text that you may need to enter or file

names you need to select are show in italic type, such as trail name.

Instructions = Menu Sequences

Most functions you perform with your unit are described as a sequence

of key strokes and selecting menu commands. We've written them in a

condensed manner for quick and easy reading.

For example, instructions for navigating a trail would look like this:

1. From the Map Page, press MENU|MENU|↓ to MY TRAILS|ENT.

2. Press ↓ to Trail 1|ENT|→|↓ to NAVIGATE|ENT.

3. You are asked to wait while it converts the trail into a route.

4. The wait message disappears and the unit begins showing

navigation information along the trail..

Translated into complete English, step 1 above would mean: "Start on

the Map Page. Press the Menu key twice. Next, repeatedly press (or

press and hold) the down arrow key to scroll down the menu and select

(highlight) the My Trails menu command. Finally, press the Enter key."

Step 2 would mean: "Press the down arrow key repeatedly to scroll to

the trail named Trail 1, and press Enter. Next, press the right arrow

key and then the down arrow key to highlight the Navigate command,

then press Enter."

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Notes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Section 2: Installation

Preparations

You can install the sonar and GPS systems in some other order if you

prefer, but we recommend this installation sequence:

Caution:

You should read over this entire installation section before drill-

ing any holes in your vehicle or vessel!

1. Determine the approximate location for the sonar/GPS unit, so you

can plan how and where to route the cables for the antenna, transducer

and power. This will help you make sure you have enough cable length

for the desired configuration.

2. Determine the approximate location for the transducer and its cable

route.

3. Determine the approximate location for the GPS antenna module

and its cable route.

4. Determine the location of your battery or other power connection,

along with the power cable route.

5. Install the transducer and route the transducer cable to the so-

nar/GPS unit.

6. Install the GPS antenna and route the antenna cable to the so-

nar/GPS unit.

7. Install the power cable and route it to the sonar/GPS unit.

8. Mount the sonar/GPS unit to the bracket.

Transducer Installation

These instructions will help you install your Skimmer^®transducer on a

transom, on a trolling motor or inside a hull. These instructions cover

both single- and dual-frequency Skimmer transducers. Please read all

instructions before proceeding with any installation.

The smaller single-frequency Skimmers typically use a one-piece,

stainless steel mounting bracket. The larger dual-frequency Skimmers

typically use a two-piece, plastic mounting bracket. The trolling motor

mount uses a one-piece plastic bracket with an adjustable strap.

These are all "kick-up" mounting brackets. They help prevent damage

if the transducer strikes an object while the boat is moving. If the

transducer does "kick-up," the bracket can easily be pushed back into

place without tools.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Read these instructions carefully before attempting the installation.

Determine which of the mounting positions is right for your boat. Re-

member, the transducer installation is the most critical part of

a sonar installation.

NOTE:

The following installation types also call for these recommended

tools and required supplies that you must provide (supplies listed

here are not included):

Single-frequency transom installations

Tools include: two adjustable wrenches, drill, #29 (0.136") drill bit, flat-

head screwdriver. Supplies: high quality, marine grade above- or below-

waterline sealant/adhesive compound.

Dual-frequency transom installations

Tools: two adjustable wrenches, drill, #20 (0.161") drill bit, flat-head

screwdriver. Supplies: four, 1" long, #12 stainless steel slotted wood

screws, high quality, marine grade above- or below-waterline seal-

ant/adhesive compound.

Single-frequency trolling motor installations

Tools: two adjustable wrenches, flat-head screwdriver. Supplies: plastic

cable ties.

Shoot-through hull installations

Tools: these will vary depending on your hull's composition. Consult your

boat dealer or manufacturer. Other tools are a wooden craft stick or

similar tool for stirring and applying epoxy, and a paper plate or piece

of cardboard to mix the epoxy on. Supplies: rubbing alcohol, 100 grit

sandpaper, specially formulated epoxy adhesive available from LEI (see

ordering information on the inside back cover). A sandwich hull also

requires polyester resin.

Selecting a Transducer Location

1. The location must be in the water at all times, at all operating speeds.

2. The transducer must be placed in a location that has a smooth flow

of water at all times. If the transducer is not placed in a smooth flow

of water, interference caused by bubbles and turbulence will show on

the sonar's display in the form of random lines or dots whenever the

boat is moving.

NOTE:

Some aluminum boats with strakes or ribs on the outside of the

hull create large amounts of turbulence at high speed. These boats

typically have large outboard motors capable of propelling the boat

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

at speeds faster than 35 mph. Typically, a good transom location on

aluminum boats is between the ribs closest to the engine.

3. The transducer should be installed with its face pointing straight

down, if possible. For shoot-thru applications: Many popular fishing

boat hulls have a flat keel pad that offers a good mounting surface. On

vee hulls, try to place the transducer where the deadrise is 10° or less.

Deadrise less than 10°

Strakes

Pad

Left, vee pad hull; right, vee hull. A pod style transducer is shown

here, but the principle is the same for Skimmers inside a hull.

4. If the transducer is mounted on the transom, make sure it doesn't

interfere with the trailer or hauling of the boat. Also, don't mount it

closer than approximately one foot from the engine's lower unit. This

will prevent cavitation (bubble) interference with propeller opera-

tion.

5. If possible, route the transducer cable away from other wiring on the

boat. Electrical noise from engine wiring, bilge pumps and aerators

can be displayed on the sonar's screen. Use caution when routing the

transducer cable around these wires.

CAUTION: Clamp the trans-

ducer cable to transom near

the transducer. This will help

prevent the transducer from

entering the boat if it is

knocked off at high speed.

Good location

Poor location

Good

location

Good location

Poor angle

Good and poor transducer locations.

How low should you go?

For most situations, you should install your Skimmer transducer so

that its centerline is level with the bottom of the boat hull.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

This will usually give you the best combination of smooth water flow

and protection from bangs and bumps.

Transom

Transducer

centerline

Hull bottom

Align transducer centerline with hull bottom.

However, there are times when you may need to adjust the transducer

slightly higher or lower. (The slots in the mounting brackets allow you

to loosen the screws and slide the transducer up or down.) If you fre-

quently lose bottom signal lock while running at high speed, the trans-

ducer may be coming out of the water as you cross waves or wakes.

Move the transducer a little lower to help prevent this.

If you cruise or fish around lots of structure and cover, your transducer

may be frequently kicking up from object strikes. If you wish, you may

move the transducer a little higher for more protection.

There are two extremes you should avoid. Never let the edge of the

mounting bracket extend below the bottom of the hull. Never let the

bottom – the face – of the transducer rise above the bottom of the hull.

Shoot-thru-hull vs. Transom Mounting

In a shoot-thru-hull installation, the transducer is bonded to the inside

of the hull with epoxy. The sonar "ping" signal actually passes through

the hull and into the water. This differs from a bolt-thru-hull installa-

tion (often called simply "thru-hull"). In that case, a hole is cut in the

hull and a specially designed transducer is mounted through the hull

with a threaded shaft and nut. This puts the transducer in direct con-

tact with the water.

Typically, shoot-thru-hull installations give excellent high speed opera-

tion and good to excellent depth capability. There is no possibility of

transducer damage from floating objects, as there is with a transom-

mounted transducer. A transducer mounted inside the hull can't be

knocked off when docking or loading on a trailer.

However, the shoot-thru-hull installation does have its drawbacks.

First, some loss of sensitivity does occur, even on the best hulls. This

varies from hull to hull, even from different installations on the same

hull. This is caused by differences in hull lay-up and construction.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Second, the transducer angle cannot be adjusted for the best fish

arches on your sonar display. (This is not an issue for flasher-style

sonars.) Lack of angle adjustment can be particularly troublesome on

hulls that sit with the bow high when at rest or at slow trolling speeds.

Third, a transducer CAN NOT shoot through wood and metal hulls.

Those hulls require either a transom mount or a thru-hull installation.

Fourth, if your Skimmer transducer has a built in temp sensor, it will

only show the temperature of the bilge, not the water surface temp.

Follow the testing procedures listed in the shoot-thru-hull installation

section at the end of this lesson to determine if you can satisfactorily

shoot through the hull.

Transom Transducer Assembly And Mounting

The best way to install these transducers is to loosely assemble all of the

parts first, place the transducer's bracket against the transom and see if

you can move the transducer so that it's parallel with the ground.

The following instructions sometimes vary depending on the mounting

bracket that came with your transducer. Single-frequency Skimmers

come with a one-piece stainless steel bracket, while dual-frequency

Skimmers come with a two-piece plastic mounting bracket. Use the set of

instructions that fits your model.

1. Assembling the bracket.

A. One-piece bracket: Press the two small plastic ratchets into the

sides of the metal bracket as shown in the following illustration. Notice

there are letters molded into each ratchet. Place each ratchet into the

bracket with the letter "A" aligned with the dot stamped into the metal

bracket. This position sets the transducer's coarse angle adjustment for a

14° transom. Most outboard and stern-drive transoms have a 14° angle.

Dot

Align plastic ratchets in bracket.

B. Two-piece bracket: Locate the four plastic ratchets in the trans-

ducer's hardware package. Press two ratchets into the sides of the plas-

tic bracket and two on either side of the transducer as shown in the fol-

lowing illustrations. Notice there are letters molded into each ratchet.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Place the ratchets into the bracket with the letter "A" aligned with the

alignment mark molded into the bracket. Place the ratchets onto the

transducer with the letter "A" aligned with the 12 o'clock position on

the transducer stem. These positions set the transducer's coarse angle

adjustment for a 14° transom. Most outboard and stern-drive transoms

have a 14° angle.

Alignment letters

Alignment

positions

Transducer

Transducer bracket

Insert and align ratchets.

Transducer

bracket

Ratchet

Add ratchets to bracket and transducer.

2. Aligning the transducer on the transom.

A. One-piece bracket: Slide the transducer between the two ratch-

ets. Temporarily slide the bolt though the transducer assembly and

hold it against the transom. Looking at the transducer from the side,

check to see if it will adjust so that its face is parallel to the ground.

If it does, then the "A" position is correct for your hull.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

If the transducer's face isn't parallel with the ground, remove the

transducer and ratchets from the bracket. Place the ratchets into the

holes in the bracket with the letter "B" aligned with the dot stamped

in the bracket.

Reassemble the transducer and bracket and place them against the

transom. Again, check to see if you can move the transducer so it's

parallel with the ground. If you can, then go to step 3A. If it doesn't,

repeat step 2A, but use a different alignment letter until you can

place the transducer on the transom correctly.

Ratchets

Insert bolt and check transducer position on transom.

B. Two-piece bracket: Assemble the transducer and bracket as shown

in the following figure. Temporarily slide the bolt though the transducer

assembly but don't tighten the nut at this time. Hold the assembled

transducer and bracket against the transom. Looking at the transducer

from the side, check to see if it will adjust so that its face is parallel to

the ground. If it does, then the "A" positions are correct for your hull.

If the transducer's face isn't parallel with the ground, remove and

disassemble the transducer and ratchets. Place the ratchets into the

bracket holes with the letter "B" aligned with the bracket alignment

mark. Place them on the transducer aligned with the 12 o'clock posi-

tion on the transducer stem.

Reassemble the transducer and bracket and place them against the

transom. Again, check to see if you can move the transducer so it's

parallel with the ground. If you can, then go to step 3B. If it doesn't,

repeat step 2B, but use a different alignment letter until you can

place the transducer on the transom correctly.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Lock washer

Nut

Bolt

Flat washer

Assemble transducer and bracket.

3. Assembling the transducer.

A. One-piece bracket: Once you determine the correct position for

the ratchets, assemble the transducer as shown in the following fig-

ure. Don't tighten the lock nut at this time.

Metal

washer

Nut

Rubber

Metal washer

Bolt

washers

Assemble transducer and bracket.

B. Two-piece bracket: Once you determine the correct position for

the ratchets, assemble the transducer as shown in the figure in step

2B. Don't tighten the lock nut at this time.

4. Drilling mounting holes.

Hold the transducer and bracket assembly against the transom. The

transducer should be roughly parallel to the ground. The trans-

ducer's centerline should be in line with the bottom of the hull. Don't

let the bracket extend below the hull!

Mark the center of each slot for the mounting screw pilot holes. You

will drill one hole in the center of each slot.

Drill the holes. For the one-piece bracket, use the #29 bit (for the #10

screws). For the two-piece bracket, use the #20 bit (for the #12 screws).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Transom

Position transducer mount on transom and mark mounting holes.

Side view shown, left, and seen from above at right.

5. Attaching transducer to transom.

A. One-piece bracket: Remove the transducer from the bracket and

re-assemble it with the cable passing through the bracket over the

bolt as shown in the following figures.

For single-frequency Skimmer, route cable over bolt and through

bracket. Side view shown, left, and seen from above at right.

Both bracket types: Attach the transducer to the transom. Slide the

transducer up or down until it's aligned properly with the bottom of

the hull as shown in the preceding and following figures. Tighten the

bracket's mounting screws, sealing them with the sealant.

Adjust the transducer so that it's parallel to the ground and tighten

the nut until it touches the outer washer, then add 1/4 turn. Don't

over tighten the lock nut! If you do, the transducer won't "kick-up" if

it strikes an object in the water.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Bottom

hull

Flat-bottom hull

Deep-"vee" hull

Align transducer centerline with hull bottom and attach transducer to

transom. Rear view of dual-frequency Skimmer shown.

6. Route the transducer cable through or over the transom to the sonar

unit. Make sure to leave some slack in the cable at the transducer. If

possible, route the transducer cable away from other wiring on the

boat. Electrical noise from the engine's wiring, bilge pumps, VHF radio

wires and cables, and aerators can be picked up by the sonar. Use cau-

tion when routing the transducer cable around these wires.

WARNING:

Clamp the transducer cable to the transom close to the

transducer. This can prevent the transducer from enter-

ing the boat if it is knocked off at high speed.

If you need to drill a hole in the transom to pass the connector through,

the required hole size be 1".

Caution:

If you drill a hole in the transom for the cable, make sure it is

located above the waterline. After installation, be sure to seal the

hole with the same marine grade above- or below-waterline seal-

ant used for the mounting screws.

7. Make a test run to determine the results. If the bottom is lost at

high speed, or if noise appears on the display, try sliding the trans-

ducer bracket down. This puts the transducer deeper into the water,

hopefully below the turbulence causing the noise. Don't allow the

transducer bracket to go below the bottom of the hull!

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Trolling Motor Bracket Installation

(single-frequency only)

1. Attach the optional TMB-S bracket to the transducer as shown in the

following figure, using the hardware supplied with the transducer.

(Note: The internal tooth washer is supplied with the TMB-S.)

TMB-S bracket

Internal tooth washer

Bolt

Nut

Flat washer

Attach motor mounting bracket to transducer.

2. Slide the adjustable strap supplied with the TMB-S through the slot

in the transducer bracket and wrap it around the trolling motor. Po-

sition the transducer to aim straight down when the motor is in the

water. Tighten the strap securely.

3. Route the transducer cable alongside the trolling motor shaft. Use

plastic ties (not included) to attach the transducer cable to the troll-

ing motor shaft. Make sure there is enough slack in the cable for the

motor to turn freely. Route the cable to the sonar unit and the trans-

ducer is ready for use.

Transducer mounted on trolling motor, side view.

Transducer Orientation and Fish Arches

If you do not get good fish arches on your display, it could be because

the transducer is not parallel with the ground when the boat is at rest

in the water or at slow trolling speeds.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Partial fish arches

Transducer aimed

too far back

Transducer aimed

too far forward

Full fish arch

Proper transducer angle

Transducer angles and their effects on fish arches.

If the arch slopes up – but not back down – then the front of the trans-

ducer is too high and needs to be lowered. If only the back half of the

arch is printed, then the nose of the transducer is angled too far down

and needs to be raised.

NOTE:

Periodically wash the transducer's face with soap and water to re-

move any oil film. Oil and dirt on the face will reduce the sensitiv-

ity or may even prevent operation.

Shoot-Thru-Hull Preparation

Hulls With Flotation Materials

The transducer installation inside a fiberglass hull must be in an area

that does not have air bubbles in the resin or separated fiberglass lay-

ers. The sonar signal must pass through solid fiberglass. A successful

transducer installation can be made on hulls with flotation materials

(such as plywood, balsa wood or foam) between layers of fiberglass if

the material is removed from the chosen area. See the following figure.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

WARNING:

Do not remove any material from your inner hull unless

you know the hull's composition. Careless grinding or

cutting on your hull can result in damage that could

sink your boat. Contact your boat dealer or manufac-

turer to confirm your hull specifications.

Fill with

Fill with resin

Inner hull

Flotation material

Epoxy to hull first

Outer hull

Epoxy the transducer to a solid portion of the hull.

For example, some (but not all) manufacturers use a layer of fiberglass,

then a core of balsa wood, finishing with an outer layer of fiberglass.

Removing the inner layer of fiberglass and the balsa wood core exposes

the outer layer of fiberglass. The transducer can then be epoxied di-

rectly to the outer layer of fiberglass. After the epoxy cures for 24

hours, fill the remaining space with polyester resin. When the job is

finished, the hull is watertight and structurally sound. Remember, the

sonar signal must pass through solid fiberglass. Any air bubbles in the

fiberglass or the epoxy will reduce or eliminate the sonar signals.

Testing Determines Best Location

Ideally, the shoot-thru transducer should be installed as close to the

transom as possible, close to the centerline. This will give you the best

performance during high speed maneuvers.

Transducer location

(high speed)

Transducer location

(trolling speed)

Shoot-thru-hull transducer locations for

high speed or trolling speed operation.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To choose the proper location for shoot-thru-hull mounting, follow these

testing procedures: (You may need a helper to complete these steps.)

1. Anchor the boat in about 30 feet of water. Add a little water to the sump

of the boat. Plug the transducer into the sonar unit, turn it on, then

hold the transducer over the side of the boat in the water. Adjust the

sensitivity and range controls until a second bottom echo is seen on the

display. (You'll need to turn off Auto Sensitivity, Auto Depth Range and

ASP™. Try a range setting that is two to three times the water depth.

The harder (more rocky) the bottom, the easier it will be to get a second

bottom signal.) Don't touch the controls once they've been set.

True bottom

Second bottom

Manual range setting

Example of a second bottom signal. Unit is in 30 feet of water, with

range set at 80 feet and sensitivity set at 87 percent.

2. Next, take the transducer out of the water and place it in the water in

the sump of the boat, face down. (The transducer face is shown in the

figure on the following page.) Notice how the signal strength decreases.

The second bottom signal will probably disappear and the bottom sig-

nal intensity will likely decrease.

3. Now move the transducer around to find the best location with the

strongest possible bottom signal. If you find a spot with an acceptable

bottom signal, mark the location and move on to step 4.

If you can't get an acceptable bottom signal, try turning up the sensitiv-

ity by three or five keystrokes and then move the transducer around

once more. If you find a spot that works, mark it and move on to step 4.

If you have to turn up sensitivity by more than five keystrokes to get a

good signal, the transducer should be mounted on the outside of the

hull. This is especially true if you have to turn sensitivity all the way

up to get a decent bottom signal.

4. Most people get good results by following steps 1 through 3, so this step

is optional. If you want to make an extra effort to be absolutely sure

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

that your selected location will work under all conditions, make a test

run with the boat on plane and observe the bottom signal. You'll need to

figure some way to prop the transducer into position while you make

your test run. (A brick or two might be sufficient to hold it in place.)

5. When you're satisfied with a location, mark it and proceed with

the installation.

Shoot-thru-hull Installation

If you are installing the transducer on a hull with floatation material

sandwiched within the hull, refer to the text "Hulls With Flotation Ma-

terials" beginning on page 24.

1. Make sure the area is clean, dry and free of oil or grease, then sand

both the inside surface of the hull and the face of the transducer with

100 grit sandpaper. The sanded hull area should be about 1-1/2 times

the diameter of the transducer. The surface of the hull must be flat

so the entire transducer face is in contact with the hull prior to bond-

ing. After sanding, clean the hull and transducer with rubbing alco-

hol to remove any sanding debris.

Spread epoxy here

Sand this surface

(unit's face)

Orient the Skimmer

with the nose facing

the bow of the boat.

To bow

Epoxy transducer to hull.

WARNING:

Use only the epoxy available from LEI. It has been for-

mulated to work with these installation procedures.

Other epoxy types may be too thin or may not cure to

the right consistency for optimum transducer perform-

ance.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2. The epoxy consists of the epoxy itself and a hardener. Remove the

two compounds from the package and place them on the paper plate.

Thoroughly stir the two compounds together until the mixture has a

uniform color and consistency. Do not mix too fast or bubbles will

form in the epoxy. After mixing, you have 20 minutes to complete the

installation before the epoxy becomes unworkable.

Spread a thin layer of epoxy (about 1/16" or 1.5 mm thick) on the face

of the transducer as shown in the previous figure. Make sure there

are no air pockets in the epoxy layer! Then, apply the remaining ep-

oxy to the sanded area on the hull.

3. Press the transducer into the epoxy, twisting and turning it to force

any air bubbles out from under the transducer face. Stop pressing

when you bottom out on the hull. When you're finished, the face of

the transducer should be parallel with the hull, with a minimum

amount of epoxy between the hull and transducer.

4. Apply a weight, such as a brick, to hold the transducer in place while

the epoxy cures. Be careful not to bump the transducer while the ep-

oxy is wet. Leave the weight in place for a minimum of three hours.

Allow the epoxy to cure for 24 hours before moving the boat.

5. After the epoxy has cured, route the cable to the sonar unit and it's

ready to use.

Speed/Temperature Sensors

Optional Speed Sensor Installation

All the units in this series can display speed and distance traveled, but

only the LMS-527cDF comes packed with a speed sensor. If you wish to

purchase an optional additional sensor for your unit, refer to the acces-

sory ordering information inside the back cover of this manual. The

following instructions describe how to install the speed sensor.

Recommended tools for this job include: drill, 7/8" drill bit, 1/8" drill bit

for pilot holes, screwdriver. Required supplies for this job include: four

#8 stainless steel wood screws (3/4" long), high quality, marine grade

above- or below-waterline sealant.

First find a location on the boat's transom where the water flow is

smoothest. Don't mount the sensor behind strakes or ribs. These will

disturb the water flow to the speed sensor. Make sure the sensor will

remain in the water when the boat is on plane. Also make sure the lo-

cation doesn't interfere with the boat's trailer. Typically, the sensor is

mounted about one foot to the side of the transom's centerline.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Once you've determined the proper location for the unit, place the sen-

sor on the transom. The bottom of the bracket should be flush with the

hull's bottom. Using the sensor as a template, mark the hull for the

screws' pilot holes. Drill four 1/8" holes, one in each end of the slots.

Mount the sensor to the hull using #8 stainless steel wood screws (not

included). Use a high quality, marine grade above- or below-waterline

sealant to seal the screws. Make sure the sensor is flush with the bot-

tom of the hull and tighten the screws.

Good location

Stern view showing good location for mounting sensor on transom.

Transom

Bottom of hull

Speed sensor mounting configuration:

side view (left) and rear view (right.)

If the base of the transom has a radius, fill the gap between the tran-

som and the sensor with the sealant. This will help ensure a smooth

water flow.

Route the sensor's cable through or over the transom to the sonar unit.

If you need to drill a hole in the transom to pass the connector through,

the required hole size is 7/8".

CAUTION:

If you drill a hole in the transom for the cable, make sure it is

located above the waterline. After installation, be sure to seal the

hole with the same marine grade above- or below-waterline seal-

ant used for the screws.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The sensor is now ready for use. Connect the sensor to the sonar socket

on the back of your unit and connect the transducer to the speed sen-

sor's socket. If you have any questions concerning the installation of

the sensor, please contact your local boat dealer.

Power Connections

Your unit comes with a power/data cable that splits into three

branches, each with several exposed wires.

The thicker three-wire cable (white, red and black) is the power supply

for your display unit. This cable has no label.

The thinner branch with three wires (red, black and shield) is the

power cable for a NMEA 2000 network. It is labeled "NMEA 2000

POWER."

The branch with four wires (blue, yellow, orange, and shield) is a data

cable, labeled "RS-232 COMM." It supports a serial communication

port. This allows your unit to exchange NMEA 0183 data with another

device, such as an autopilot, DSC marine radio or computer.

Display unit power wires:

white, red and black

To unit

NMEA 2000 power wires:

red, black and shield

Data cable wires:

blue, yellow, orange,

and shield

The Power/Data cable for this unit.

NOTE:

There are two basic power connection options, which are shown in

the following two diagrams. Read the following instructions

carefully to determine which power connection applies to

your unit. Depending on your configuration, you may not use all of

these wires.

Caution:

All of the wires in the power/data cable have bare ends for eas-

ier installation. The bare ends on any unused wires could cause

an electrical short if left exposed. To prevent this, you should

cover the individual wire ends – either by capping them with

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

wire nuts, wrapping them with electrical tape or both. (You

should cut off the bare wire before taping off the ends.)

Powering Your Display Unit

The display unit works from a 12-volt DC battery system. Attach the

display power cable (with provided 3-amp fuse) to an accessory switch

or power bus. If this results in electrical interference, connect direct to

a battery but install an in-line switch on the cable.

Caution:

We strongly recommend that you shut off the power supply to the

power cable when the unit is not in use, especially in saltwater en-

vironments. When the unit is turned off but still connected to a

power supply, electrolysis can occur in the power cable plug. This

may result in corrosion of the plug body along with the electrical

contacts in the cable and the unit's power socket. Risk of electroly-

sis corrosion is even greater when the cable is unplugged from the

unit, but still connected to a power source.

We recommend you connect the power cable to the auxiliary power

switch included in most boat designs. If that results in electrical

interference, or if such a switch is not available, we recommend

connecting direct to the battery and installing an in-line switch.

This will let you shut off power to the power cable when the unit is

not in use. When you are not using the unit, you should always

shut off power to the power cable, especially when the power cable

is disconnected from the unit.

WARNING:

This product must be independently fused with the en-

closed 3-amp fuse (or equivalent), even if you connect to

a fused accessory or power bus.

If a malfunction happens inside the unit, extensive dam-

age can occur if the enclosed fuse is not used. As with all

electrical devices, this unit could be damaged to a point

it cannot be repaired and could even cause harm to the

user when not properly fused.

Failure to use a 3-amp fuse will void your warranty.

If possible, keep the power cable away from other boat wiring, especially

the engine's wires. This will provide the best isolation from electrical

noise. If the cable is not long enough, splice #18 gauge wire onto it.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The display power cable has three wires, white, red and black. Red is the

positive (+) lead, black is negative (–) or ground. The white wire is un-

used by your unit and should be capped. Make sure to attach the in-line

fuse holder to the red lead as close to the power source as possible.

For example, if you have to extend the power cable to the power bus or

battery, attach one end of the fuse holder directly to the power bus or

battery. This will protect both the unit and the power cable in the event

of a short.

This unit has reverse polarity protection. No damage will occur if the

power wires are reversed. However, the unit will not work until the

wires are attached correctly.

Power Diagram A

Mandatory

To unit

network

power-off

3-amp fuse

switch

NMEA 2000

Power Cable

Black

Red

Shield

3-amp fuse

Display Unit

Power Cable

Black

Recommended

display unit

power-off switch

White

(unused)

12 volt DC

power source

Data Cable

Use this method if you are powering the display unit and a GPS mod-

ule or the display unit and a NMEA 2000 network. (Fuses may be dif-

ferent from those shown.).

The network and any NMEA 2000 devices, including the GPS

module, will not operate unless the NMEA 2000 Power Cable is

connected to power. The NMEA 2000 power cable must be connected

to power even if your only NMEA 2000 device is the GPS module and it

is connected to the display unit's Network socket. (However, never

connect multiple power sources to a NMEA 2000 network. If you

have a network that is already powered, see diagram B on page 33.)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Power Diagram B

To unit

Red wire with

3-amp fuse

White wire

(unused)

Display Unit

Power Cable

All unused Data

or NMEA 2000

power wires

should be

capped with

wire nuts and

electrical tape

to prevent

Black wire

Recommended

power off switch

12 volt DC

power source

shorts.

Data Cable

NMEA 2000 Power Cable

Use this method if you are only powering your display unit and are not

powering a NMEA 2000 network or any NMEA 2000 accessory device,

including a GPS module. (Fuse may be different from that shown.)

The method in diagram B is also used when your display unit is con-

nected to a NMEA 2000 network that is already connected to power.

(Never connect multiple power sources to a NMEA 2000 network.)

Powering a NMEA 2000 Network Bus

A NMEA 2000 bus must be connected to a power source to operate.

NMEA 2000 devices, including GPS modules, draw their power from

the network bus.

If you have a pre-existing NMEA 2000 network installation, it may al-

ready be connected to another power source. If you are not sure about a

network's power status, consult the boat manufacturer or dealer. If your

NMEA 2000 bus is already powered, you can ignore the NMEA 2000

Power cable and use the method shown in Power Diagram B above.

Never attach two power sources to a single NMEA 2000 bus.

If you do need to power your NMEA 2000 bus, attach the NMEA 2000

Power cable to an accessory switch as indicated in power diagram A on

page 32. The NMEA 2000 Power cable's red wire should be attached

(with provided 3-amp fuse) to the positive (+) terminal. The NMEA

2000 Power cable's black and shield wires should both be attached to

the negative (–) terminal.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

WARNING:

The NMEA 2000 network bus is always on and constantly

drawing power. You must connect NMEA power to a

switched power source so you can turn off the network

when not in use. Failure to connect to and use a power

switch will drain your boat battery, which could stop

your boat's operation.

Connecting to a NMEA 2000 Network

Your unit can be connected to a NMEA 2000 bus, receiving sensor in-

formation from units and devices attached to the network. Contact LEI

Extras (look inside back cover for accessory ordering information) for

NMEA 2000 accessories.

NOTE:

GPS data from your internal GPS receiver can not be transmitted

across a NMEA 2000 network. The only way to transmit GPS data

across the network is to add a LGC module to the network. For

more information see page 203.

NMEA 0183 Wiring

(Data cable)

To exchange NMEA 0183 data, this unit has one NMEA 0183 version

2.0 communication port. Com port one (Com-1) can be used to receive

NMEA format GPS data. The com port can also transmit NMEA format

GPS data to another device.

The four wires for the com port are combined with the Power Supply

cable and NMEA 2000 Power cable to form the power/data cable

(shown earlier). Com-1 uses the yellow wire to transmit, the orange

wire to receive and the shield wire for signal ground. Your unit does

not use the blue wire.

Orange (Receive)

NMEA Transmit

To Other

GPS Receiver

Com-1

To unit

Shield (Ground)

Ground

Com-1 wiring to receive NMEA position information

from some other GPS receiver.

Yellow (Transmit)

Shield (Ground)

NMEA Receive

Ground

Com-1

To unit

To Other

Device

Com-1 wiring to transmit NMEA position information

to another NMEA-compatible device.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

LMS-527cDF iGPS rear view

Sonar

socket

Ethernet (future

enhancement)

Power/Data socket

Network socket

SP-BL optional

speed sensor

Power

cable

NMEA 2000

Power cable

Data

Cable

Transducer

LMS-522c and LMS-527cDF cable connections.

Mounting the Unit: Bracket or Portable

You can install your unit on the dash with the gimbal bracket or it can

be used with a portable power pack. The unit must be mounted in a

location with a clear view of the sky, so the internal GPS an-

tenna can lock-on to satellite signals.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

If you use the supplied bracket, you may be interested in the optional

R-A-M^®bracket mounting system. This converts the unit's gimbal

bracket to a swivel mount, which can be used on the dash or overhead

mounting positions.

Optional R-A-M mounting system.

Bracket Installation

Mount the unit in a convenient location, provided there is clearance

behind the unit when it's tilted for the best viewing angle. This must

be a location with a clear view of the sky, so the internal GPS

antenna can lock-on to satellite signals. Make sure there is enough

room behind the unit to attach the power and transducer cables.

Holes in the bracket's base allow wood screw or through-bolt mount-

ing. You may need to place a piece of plywood on the back side of thin

fiberglass panels to reinforce the panel and secure the mounting hard-

ware.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Front

Install the gimbal bracket. Adjust the bracket so the arms slope to-

ward the front of your unit.

Drill a 1-inch (25.4 mm) hole in the dash for the power, transducer and

antenna cables. The best location for this hole is immediately under the

gimbal bracket location. This way, the bracket can be installed so that

it covers the hole, holds the cables in position and results in a neat in-

stallation. Some customers, however, prefer to mount the bracket to the

side of the cable hole — it's a matter of personal preference.

72.9

[2.87]

23.4

[0.92]

173.9

[6.85]

137.9

[5.43]

157.9

[6.22]

56.9

[2.24]

Millimeter

[Inch]

Front view (left) and side view (right) showing dimensions of the LMS-

522c and LMS-527cDF sonar/GPS units mounted on gimbal bracket.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

After drilling the hole, pass the transducer connector up through the

hole from under the dash, followed by antenna connector. Pass the

power cable's bare-wire end down though the hole from the top.

If you wish, you can fill in the hole around the cables with a good ma-

rine caulking compound. (Some marine dealers stock cable hole covers

to conceal the opening.) No matter what type of installation you prefer,

be sure to leave enough slack in the cables to allow tilting or swiveling

the unit. If you choose to fill in the hole, be sure to position the cables

against the rear edge of the hole as you apply the fill material.

Before positioning the bracket, make sure the location provides a clear

view of the sky, so the internal GPS antenna can lock-on to satellite sig-

nals. Now, hold the cables against the rear edge of the hole. Slide the

bracket over the hole and butt the rear of the bracket base against the

cables, thus pinning them in place against the side of the hole. Fasten

the bracket to the dash. Attach the unit to the gimbal bracket using the

gimbal knobs and washers.

Portable Installation

Like many Lowrance products, the unit is capable of portable operation

by using an optional portable power pack. The power pack, a magnet-

equipped antenna module and an optional portable transducer, ex-

pands the uses for your sonar/GPS unit. It makes it easy to transfer

your unit from a boat to a car, recreational vehicle, airplane or other

vehicle without mounting a second bracket. You can use it in your own

car or boat, then take it along when riding in a friend's vehicle.

The power pack can be used with eight "D" cell alkaline batteries or an

optional sealed, rechargeable battery. Visit our web site for a complete

listing of all the available portable power packs.

PPP-15 Portable Power Pack with transducer installed. Shown with

the X67C IceMachine™ .

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MMC or SD Card Memory Card Installation

Your unit uses a MultiMedia Card to store information, such as sonar

logs, custom maps, waypoints, trails and other GPS data. It can also

use Secure Digital Cards (SD card) to store data.

NOTE:

Throughout this manual, we will use the term MMC, but just re-

member that your unit can use an MMC or SD card to store data.

Both of these solid-state flash memory devices are about the size of a

postage stamp. An SD card is slightly thicker than an MMC. As this

manual went to press, MMCs were available in storage capacities of 8

MB, 16 MB, 32 MB, 64 MB and 128 MB. SD cards were available with

capacities of 8 MB, 16 MB, 32 MB, 64 MB, 128 MB, 256 MB and 1 GB.

Additional MMC cards are available from LEI Extras; see ordering in-

formation inside the back cover of this manual. MMCs and SD cards

are also available at many camera and consumer electronics stores.

The MMC slot is located in a compartment on the front of the case. The

compartment door is located at the lower right corner. The following

figure shows a close-up with the door opened.

MMC groove for card removal

Thumb

screw

Insert card face up,

this way

Memory card compartment with a 16 MB MMC card installed.

To remove an MMC

1. Open the card compartment door by unscrewing the thumb screw.

The screw should only be finger tight. If it was over-tightened, use a

thumbnail, a coin or a screwdriver to open the door.

2. Press a finger against the label of the MMC and drag it from the slot.

3. Close the compartment door and fasten the thumb screw finger tight.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To insert a MMC or SD Card

1. Open the card compartment door.

2. Grasp the bottom of the MMC and push the top of the card into the

slot. Once the card is started, use your fingernails to slide it the rest of

the way to the left, until it is firmly seated in the slot.

3. Close the compartment door and fasten the thumb screw finger tight.

Other Accessories

LMS-522c and LMS-527cDF accessories include MMC cards, MMC

card readers and MapCreate™ 6 mapping software for your computer.

MMC card readers are available in USB and parallel port versions.

Two switch boxes are available for this unit. The SB-7X transducer

switch box switches two transducers to one sonar unit. The SB-8X trans-

ducer switch box switches two sonar units to one transducer.

If these accessories are not available from your dealer, see the acces-

sory ordering information on the inside back cover of this manual. Visit

our web site for a complete listing of all the available accessories.

Cleaning Towel

A lint-free microfiber towel is included for cleaning the unit’s screen.

The towel is highly effective in clearing away water spots, smudges and

finger prints. Just wipe the screen with the dry towel — it's not neces-

sary to moisten the towel with water. If the screen is badly soiled, you

may use water or common window or lens cleaners. DO NOT use pol-

ishing compounds or any other abrasive product.

If you lose the towel or wear it out, you can replace it with a similar

microfiber cloth. These are often available where shop towels or auto-

mobile cleaning towels are sold.

Caution:

Cleaning fabrics other than the microfiber towel type may scratch

the screen. Polishing compounds or other abrasive cleaners will

scratch the screen. Damage caused by incorrect cleaning is not cov-

ered by the warranty. You may wash the towel if it becomes soiled

or loses its effectiveness, but do not use fabric softener. Fabric sof-

tener will ruin the towel’s cleaning capability.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MapCreate™ 6 CD-ROM (left). MMC card reader for USB ports, (right).

Now that you have your unit installed, move on to Section 3, Basic So-

nar Operations. There, we'll present a series of step-by-step tutorials to

teach you the basics of how to operate your sonar.

NOTE:

When you first turn the unit on, the Map Page appears. If you'd

rather start learning about GPS operation first, turn over to Sec-

tion 6, Basic GPS Operations.

Face Cover

Your unit comes with a white protective cover that snaps on and off the

front of the unit. This cover is intended for use when the vehicle is idle.

WARNING:

When the unit is mounted in an unprotected area, such

as an open boat cockpit, the protective face cover must

be removed when the vehicle is moving at high speed.

This includes towing a boat on a trailer at highway

speeds. Otherwise, wind blast can pop off the cover.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Notes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Section 3: Basic Sonar Operation

This section addresses the unit's most basic sonar operations.

Before you turn on the sonar unit, it's a good idea to learn about the

different keys, the Main Menu, the four Page screens and how they all

work together. BUT, if you just can't wait to get on the water, turn to

the one-page Quick Reference on page 51.

Keyboard

MMC slot access door

LMS-527cDF sonar/GPS unit, front view, showing map with sonar split

screen, keyboard and access door for the MMC slot.

1. PWR/LIGHT (Power & Light) – The PWR key turns the unit on and

off and activates the backlight.

2. PAGES – Pressing this and the ← → arrow keys switches the unit

between the four different page screens. (Satellite Status Page, Naviga-

tion Page, Map Page and Sonar Page.) Each page represents one of the

unit's major operation modes.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3. MENU – Press this key to show the menus and submenus, which

allow you to select a command or adjust a feature. This also accesses

search functions for streets, intersections, addresses and highway exits.

4. ARROW KEYS – These keys are used to navigate through the

menus, make menu selections, move the map and sonar chart cursors

and enter data.

5. ENT/ICONS (Enter & Icons) – This key allows you to save data, ac-

cept values or execute menu commands. It is also used to create event

marker icons.

6. EXIT – The Exit key lets you return to the previous screen, clear

data or close a menu.

7. WPT – (Waypoint) The Waypoint key is used to save and recall way-

points, search for waypoints and access the waypoint list. It also

launches the Point-of-Interest (POI) search menus and is involved in

some navigation functions.

8. ZOUT – (Zoom Out) – This key lets you zoom the screen out. On the

Sonar Page, it returns you to a full sonar chart display, showing the

entire water column from surface to bottom. On the Map Page, it lets

you see a larger geographic area on the map. Less detail is seen as you

zoom out.

9. ZIN – (Zoom In) – This key lets you zoom the screen in. On the Sonar

Page, this key enlarges fish signals and bottom detail. On the Map

Page, zooming in lets you see greater detail in a smaller geographic

area on the map.

Power/lights on and off

To turn on the unit, press PWR. As the unit powers up, the Map Page is

displayed first. To switch to the Sonar Page, press PAGES, select SONAR

and press ENT.

To turn on the backlight, press PWR again. The unit has three back-

light levels. Repeatedly pressing PWR will cycle through the backlight

settings and turn off the backlight.

Turn off the unit by pressing and holding the PWR key for 3 seconds.

Main Menu

The unit has a Main Menu, which contains some function commands

and some setup option commands. The instructions in this section will

deal only with sonar functions, the basic commands that make the unit

show sonar signals on your screen. This sonar unit will work fine right

out of the box with the factory default settings.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

But, if you want to learn about the various sonar options, see Sec. 4,

Sonar Options & Other Features.

You can access the Main Menu from any of the four Page screens by

pressing MENU|MENU. To clear the menu screen and return to the page

display, press EXIT.

Main Menu.

The Main Menu commands and their functions are:

Screen: changes the contrast or brightness of the display screen.

Sounds: enables or disables the sounds for key strokes and alarms and

sets the alarm style.

Transparency: adjusts the level of transparency for menus.

Alarms: turns sonar and GPS alarms on or off and changes alarm

thresholds.

Route Planning: used to plan, view or navigate a route.

My Trails: shows, creates and deletes plot trails. Also used to navigate

or backtrack a trail.

Cancel Navigation: turns off the various navigation commands. Used

to stop navigating after you have reached your destination waypoint,

Point of Interest or map cursor location; or after you reach the end of a

route or trail.

Sonar Setup: sets various sonar options.

GPS Setup: sets various GPS receiver options.

System Setup: sets general configuration options.

NMEA 2000: provides access to all NMEA 2000 network setup options,

including the configuration of devices on the network. For more infor-

mation, see Section 10: NMEA 2000 Menu.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Sun/Moon Calculations: finds the rising and setting time of the sun

and the moon.

Trip Calculator: shows trip status and statistics.

Timers: controls the up timer, down timer and alarm clock settings.

Browse MMC Files: this allows you to view the installed MMC card

and the files it contains.

Pages

The unit has five Page displays that represent the four major operating

modes. They are the Satellite Status Page, the Navigation Page, the Map

Page and Sonar Page. They are accessed by pressing the PAGES key,

then using → or ← to select a Page. (Clear the Pages Menu by pressing

EXIT.)

Pages Menu showing Sonar display options.

Satellite Status Page

The Satellite Status Page provides detailed information on the status

of the unit's satellite lock-on and position acquisition. To get to the Sat-

ellite Status Page: Press the PAGES key, then use → or ← to select

STATUS. (Clear the Pages Menu by pressing EXIT).

This page represents a GPS function, so it is discussed in much greater

detail in Sec. 6.

No matter what Page you are on, a flashing current position indica-

tor/question mark symbol and flashing GPS data displays indicate that

satellite lock has been lost and there is no position confirmed.

WARNING:

Do not begin navigating with this unit until the numbers

have stopped flashing!

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Satellite Status Page.

Navigation Page

This screen has a compass rose that not only shows your direction of

travel, but also the direction to a recalled waypoint. To get to the Navi-

gation Page: Press PAGES| → or ← to NAVIGATION|EXIT.

This page represents a GPS function, but also has a navigation with

sonar option, which will keep you updated on what is under your boat

as well as where you’re going.

Navigation page with Sonar (left). Navigation Page with digital data

(right).

Map Page

The Map Page screens show your course and track from a "bird's-eye"

view, on a moving map. By default, this unit shows the map with north

always at the top of the screen. The arrow in the center of the screen is

your present position. It points in the direction you're traveling.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Map Pages, showing position on Bull Shoals Lake, Arkansas. The full

map option (left). Map with sonar option (right).

Map Page is also the default screen that appears when you turn on the

unit. To get to the Map Page from another page: Press PAGES| → or ←

to MAP|EXIT.

You can display a split screen showing both the Map and Sonar pages

at the same time. This feature is discussed in Sec. 4, Sonar Options &

Other Features.

The Map Page represents a GPS function, so it is discussed in much

greater detail in Sec. 6.

Sonar Page

The Sonar Page displays the sonar chart. This is a "cross-section" view

of the water column beneath the boat. The chart moves across the

screen, displaying sonar signal echoes that represent fish, structure

and the bottom.

To get to the Sonar Page: Press the PAGES key, then use → or ← to se-

lect SONAR. (Clear the Pages Menu by pressing EXIT.) The Pages Menu

also offers five chart display options under the Sonar Page category. To

access them, press PAGES|← or→ to SONAR|↓ to Option Name|EXIT.

The Sonar Page also has its own menu, which is used for some advanced

functions and for setting various options. (Sonar Options and other fea-

tures are discussed in Sec. 4.) To Access the Sonar Page menu, from the

Sonar Page press MENU.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Pages Menu (left) showing sonar chart display option commands.

Sonar Page in full sonar chart display mode (right).

Split Zoom page (left) and Split Frequency page (right).

Digital Data page (left) and Flasher page (right).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Sonar Page Menu.

Surface clutter

Digital data

overlay

Surface signal

(depth &

temperature)

Depth scale

In FasTrack, fish

arches show as

horizontal bars.

Fish arches

Zoom bar

Structure

FasTrack

bar graph

Bottom signal

Sonar Page, showing full sonar chart mode.

You can customize how the Sonar Page displays its pictures and other

data in many ways.

We'll discuss all of those features and options in Sec. 4, but to show you

how easy this unit is to operate, the following page contains a simpli-

fied, 10-step quick reference that will cover most fish finding situa-

tions. The quick reference describes how your unit will operate with all

the sonar features in their automatic modes, which are set at the fac-

tory.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic Sonar Quick Reference

1. Depress the PWR key to turn on the unit.

2. Opening screen displays Map Page. Rotate through the four main

Page screens (Map Page, Satellite Status Page, Navigation Page, Sonar

Page) by pressing PAGES|← or → to select Page Name|EXIT. Switch

Pages to display Sonar Page.

3. If GPS data is desired, wait while unit locates satellites and calculates

current position. When the unit acquires position, a tone sounds and a posi-

tion acquired message appears.

4. With position acquired (if desired), head for your fishing grounds.

Your unit will automatically display digital depth and surface water

temperature in the top left corner of the screen.

The auto settings will track the bottom, displaying it in the lower por-

tion of the screen. The full sonar chart will scroll from right to left,

showing you what's under the boat as you cruise across the water. You

can change the display by:

Zoom in to enlarge the chart for more detail: press ZIN.

Zoom out to return to full chart mode: press ZOUT.

5. Watch the display for the appearance of fish symbols (or arches, if

Fish I.D.™ is turned off). When you see fish symbols or arches, you've

found fish! Stop the boat and get your lure or bait into the water at the

depth indicated on the sonar chart.

6. Gauge the fish depth by visually comparing the fish symbols or

arches with the depth scale on the right side of the screen.

7. If you are drifting at a very low speed or anchored, you are not mov-

ing fast enough for a fish to return the tell-tale fish arch signal. As you

drift over a fish, or as a fish swims through the transducer's signal

cone, the fish echo will appear as a straight line suspended between the

surface and the bottom when Fish I.D. is turned off.

8. To turn off the unit, press and hold PWR key for three seconds.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Sonar Operations

As you can see from the quick reference on the previous page, basic operation

is pretty easy, right out of the box. If you are a sonar novice, try operating the

unit with the factory defaults until you get a feel for how it's working.

As you're learning the basics, there is one setting you might want to tinker

with from time to time — Sensitivity.

Sensitivity controls the unit's ability to pick up echoes. If you want to see

more detail, try increasing the sensitivity, a little at a time. There are situa-

tions when too much clutter appears on the screen. Decreasing the sensitivity

can reduce the clutter and show the strongest fish echoes, if fish are present.

As you change the sensitivity setting, you can see the difference on the chart

as it scrolls.

Fig. 1

Fig. 2

Fig. 3

Fig. 4

These figures show results of different sensitivity levels on the same loca-

tion. Fig. 1: Sensitivity at 88 percent, determined by Auto Sensitivity.

Typical of full auto mode. Fig. 2: Sensitivity set at 75 percent. Fig. 3: Sen-

sitivity set at 50 percent. Fig. 4: Sensitivity set at 100 percent.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

You can change the sensitivity level whether you are in Auto Sensitivity

mode or Manual Sensitivity mode. The adjustment method works the

same in both modes, but it gives you slightly different results.

Adjusting sensitivity in Auto Sensitivity Mode is similar to manually ad-

justing a car's speed with the accelerator pedal while cruise control is on.

You can tell the car to run faster, but when you let off the gas the cruise

control automatically keeps you from running slower than the minimum

speed setting. In the unit, auto mode will let you increase sensitivity to

100 percent, but the unit will limit your minimum setting. This prevents

you from turning sensitivity down too low to allow automatic bottom

tracking. When you change the setting with auto turned on, the unit will

continue to track the bottom and make minor adjustments to the sensitiv-

ity level, with a bias toward the setting you selected.

Adjusting sensitivity in Manual Sensitivity Mode is similar to driving a

car without cruise control — you have complete manual control of the

car's speed. In the unit, manual mode allows you to set sensitivity at

100 percent (maximum) or zero percent (minimum.) Depending on wa-

ter conditions, the bottom signal may completely disappear from the

screen when you reduce sensitivity to about 50 percent or less!

Try adjusting sensitivity in both auto and manual modes to see how

they work.

To adjust sensitivity:

1. Press MENU|ENT.

2. The Sensitivity Control Bar appears. Press ↓ to decrease sensitivity;

press ↑ to increase sensitivity. When it's set at the desired level, press

EXIT. (When you reach the maximum or minimum limit, a tone sounds.)

Sonar Menu with Sensitivity command selected (left). The Sensitivity

Control Bar (right).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

NOTE:

If you want to change the sensitivity in Manual Mode, first turn off

Auto Sensitivity: from the Sonar Page, press MENU|↓ to AUTO SENSI-

TIVITY|ENT|↑ to SENSITIVITY|ENT. Press ↓ or ↑ to pick a different sen-

sitivity setting. When it's set at the desired level, press EXIT.

Important Tip:

While you are experimenting and learning, it's possible to scramble

the settings so that the sonar picture disappears from your screen.

If that happens, remember that it's easy to switch back to full

automatic operation by simply restoring the factory auto settings.

To Restore Factory Settings:

2. The unit asks if you want to reset all the options. Press ← to

YES|ENT. All options are reset, and the unit reverts back to the Map

Page at the 4000 mile zoom range. (Any recorded sonar logs or GPS

data will be unchanged.)

Fish Symbols vs. Full Sonar Chart

You may have noticed in the quick reference that we used fish arches

in full sonar chart mode for our example, and not the popular Fish

I.D.™ fish symbol feature. Here's why.

Fish I.D. is an easier way for a sonar novice to recognize a fishy signal

return when he sees it. However, locating fish by symbol only has some

limitations.

Your sonar unit's microprocessor is remarkably powerful, but it can be

fooled. Some of the echoes calculated to be fish could be tree limbs or tur-

tles! To see what's under your boat in maximum detail, we recommend

you turn off Fish I.D. and begin learning to interpret fish arches.

Fish I.D. is most handy when you're in another part of the boat or per-

forming some task that prevents you from watching the sonar screen.

Then, you can turn on Fish I.D. and the audible fish alarm. When that

lunker swims under your boat, you'll hear it!

Fish I.D. can also be useful when you want to screen out some of the

sonar detail gathered by your unit. For example, in one case fisherman

in San Francisco Bay saw clouds of clutter in the water but no fish

arches. When a down rigger was pulled up, it brought up several small

jellyfish. The fisherman switched their sonar to Fish I.D., which

screened out the schools of jellyfish and clearly showed the game fish

there as fish symbols.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Other Free Training Aids

The sonar options section discusses Fish I.D., fish alarms and other

features in greater detail. If you or a friend has Internet access, you can

also learn more about interpreting what you see on your sonar screen.

Visit our web site, www.lowrance.com. Be sure to check out the free

Sonar Tutorial, which includes animated illustrations and more pic-

tures of actual sonar returns, all described in detail. There's even a

"printer friendly" version of the tutorial available on our web site…it

makes a great supplement to this operation manual!

You can also download a free copy of our Sonar Viewer software. This

PC-based software application plays back any sonar chart log recorded

with a Lowrance sonar product. Features include:

•

Adjustable range, zoom, sensitivity, color line, noise rejection,

surface clarity, etc. of the recorded file.

•

Color interpretation of sonar signals can be user defined.

Operates like a Windows Multimedia Player with forward, re-

verse, pause, fast forward, fast reverse, and scroll buttons.

•

Adjustments update the entire record displayed.

Can print in full color.

Window can dynamically be sized on your monitor.

Mouse cursor shows GPS position, depth and sounding number

anywhere on the visible record.

For the ultimate training aid, be sure to download the free emulator

software for your unit. Aside from being fun, this program can help you

learn both basic and advanced operations without burning boat fuel!

Lowrance is one of the first sonar manufacturers to provide this type of

training tool for customers.

This PC application simulates the actual sonar/GPS unit on your com-

puter. You can run it from your computer keyboard or use your mouse

to press the virtual keys. Easy download and installation instructions

are available on our web site.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Free training emulator is available for your unit on our web site.

The emulator works exactly like your real sonar/GPS unit. Using the

Sonar Simulator and GPS Simulator features, it allows you to play

back sonar logs, run GPS routes and trails and create real waypoints

you can use in the field! You can even take snapshots of the Sonar

Chart and print them or e-mail them to friends.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Section 4: Sonar Options

ASP™ (Advanced Signal Processing)

The ASP™ feature is a noise rejection system built into the sonar unit

that constantly evaluates the effects of boat speed, water conditions

and interference. This automatic feature gives you the best display pos-

sible under most conditions.

The ASP feature is an effective tool in combating noise. In sonar terms,

noise is any undesired signal. It is caused by electrical and mechanical

sources such as bilge pumps, engine ignition systems and wiring, air

bubbles passing over the face of the transducer, even vibration from the

engine. In all cases, noise can produce unwanted marks on the display.

The ASP feature has four settings — Off, Low, Medium and High. If

you have high noise levels, try using the "High" ASP setting. However,

if you are having trouble with noise, we suggest that you take steps to

find the interference source and fix it, rather than continually using

the unit with the high ASP setting.

There are times when you may want to turn the ASP feature off. This

allows you to view all incoming echoes before they are processed by the

ASP feature.

Sonar Menu with Sonar Features highlighted (left). Sonar Features

menu (right) with Noise Rejection (ASP) set to default low setting.

To change the ASP level:

1. From the Sonar Page, press MENU|↓ to SONAR FEATURES|ENT.

2. Press ↓ to NOISE REJECTION|ENT.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3. Press ↓ or ↑ to select a setting, then press ENT.

4. To return to the previous page, press EXIT|EXIT.

Alarms

This unit has three different types of sonar alarms. The first is the Fish

Alarm. It sounds when the Fish I.D.™ feature determines that an echo

is a fish.

Another alarm is the Zone Alarm, which consists of a bar on the side of

the screen. Any echo on the chart that appears inside this bar triggers

this alarm.

The last alarm is the Depth Alarm, which has both a Shallow and a

Deep setting. Only the bottom signal will trigger this alarm. This is

useful as an anchor watch, a shallow water alert or for navigation.

Depth Alarms

The depth alarms sound a tone when the bottom signal goes shallower

than the shallow alarm's setting or deeper than the deep alarm's set-

ting. For example, if you set the shallow alarm to 10 feet, the alarm

will sound a tone if the bottom signal is less than 10 feet. It will con-

tinue to sound until the bottom goes deeper than 10 feet.

The deep alarm works just the opposite. It sounds a warning tone if the

bottom depth goes deeper than the alarm's setting. Both depth alarms

work only off the digital bottom depth signals. No other targets will trip

these alarms. These alarms can be used at the same time or individually.

Main Menu with GPS Alarms selected (left). Sonar Alarms menu

(right).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To adjust and turn on the shallow alarm:

2. Press → to SHALLOW ALARM DEPTH|ENT.

3. Press ↑ or ↓ to change the first number, then press → to move the

cursor to the next number and repeat until the depth is correct, then

press ENT.

4. Press ← to SHALLOW ALARM ENABLED|ENT|EXIT|EXIT|EXIT.

5. To turn off the alarm, press MENU|MENU|↓ to ALARMS|ENT|↓ to SO-

To switch to a different depth setting, open the Sonar Alarms menu

and repeat the instructions in step 3 above.

To adjust and turn on the deep alarm:

2. Press ↓ to DEEP ALARM ENABLED|→ to DEEP ALARM DEPTH|ENT.

3. Press ↑ or ↓ to change the first number, then press → to move the

cursor to the next number and repeat until the depth is correct, then

press ENT.

4. Press ← to DEEP ALARM ENABLED|ENT|EXIT|EXIT|EXIT.

5. To turn off the alarm, press MENU|MENU|↓ to ALARMS|ENT|↓ to SO-

To switch to a different depth setting, open the Sonar Alarms menu

and repeat the instructions in step 3 above.

Zone Alarm

The zone alarm is triggered when any echo passes inside the zone

alarm bar, shown on the right side of the screen.

To adjust and turn on the zone alarm:

2. Press ↓ to ZONE ALARM ENABLED|→ to ADJUST ZONE|ENT.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Sonar Alarms menu with Adjust Zone command selected (left).

Adjust Zone Alarm selection box with Upper selected (right).

3. To set the upper boundary for the Zone Alarm, use ← or→ to select

UPPER, then press ↑ or ↓ to move the top of the bar to the desired depth.

4. To set the lower boundary for the Zone Alarm, use ← or→ to select

LOWER, then press ↑ or ↓ to move the bottom of the bar to the desired

depth.

echo — fish, bottom, structure — within the zone alarm's depth range

will trigger the zone alarm.

6. To turn off the alarm, press MENU|MENU|↓ to ALARMS|ENT|↓ to SO-

To switch to a different depth setting, open the Sonar Alarms menu

and repeat the instructions in steps 3 and 4 above.

Fish Alarm

Use the fish alarm for a distinctive audible alarm when fish or other

suspended objects are detected by the Fish I.D.™ feature (Fish I.D.

must be turned on for the Fish Alarm to work). A different tone sounds

for each fish symbol size shown on the display.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Sonar Alarms menu with Fish Alarm selected. The check box to the left

is blank, indicating the alarm is turned off.

To turn on fish alarm:

2. Press ↓ to FISH ALARM|ENT|EXIT|EXIT|EXIT.

3. To turn off the alarm, press MENU|MENU|↓ to ALARMS|ENT|↓ to SO-

GPS Alarms

You can set an arrival alarm to flash a warning message and sound a

tone when you cross a preset distance from a waypoint. For example, if

you have the arrival alarm set to .1 mile, then the alarm will flash a

message when you come within .1 mile of the recalled waypoint.

GPS Alarm highlighted on Alarms menu (left). GPS Alarms menu

(right).

The off course alarm warns you when your track drifts too far to the

right or left of the course line to the waypoint. For example, if the

alarm is set to .1 mile, then the alarm flashes a message if you drift .1

miles to the right or left of the line to the waypoint.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The anchor alarm is triggered when you drift outside of a preset radius.

Using the .1 mile as an example, if you're anchored and the boat moves

more than .1 miles, a tone will sound and a message will appear.

1. To set an alarm, press MENU|MENU|↓ to ALARMS|ENT|ENT.

2. Use ↓ ↑ to select the desired category, then press ENT to turn on

(check) or turn off (uncheck) the desired Alarm Enabled box.

3. To change distance settings, use ↓ ↑ to select the desired category,

then press →|ENT to activate the distance dialog box. Press ↑ ↓ to

change the first character, then press → to the next character and re-

peat until the distance is set.

4. When the adjustments are finished, return to the main page display

by repeatedly pressing EXIT.

IMPORTANT ALARM NOTES

Anchor Alarm - The anchor alarm may be triggered even when

you're sitting still. This can happen when using a small (less than

.05 mile) anchor alarm range.

Arrival Alarm - If you set the arrival alarm's distance to a small

number and you run a route (see the Navigate Routes segment),

this unit may not show navigation data to the next waypoint, once

you arrive at the first one. You may not be able to come close

enough to the first waypoint to trip the arrival alarm.

NMEA 2000 Alarms

The NMEA 2000 Alarm can be set to monitor multiple EP-10 Fuel Flow

and EP-15 Fluid Level sensors. You can set a threshold for each alarm

in its corresponding Percent box. Thresholds give you control over

when the alarm will go off. You may want the alarm to go off when the

black water tank is filled to 75 percent of its capacity, likewise, you

may want to know when the fuel level falls below 30 percent of tank

capacity.

To get to the NMEA 2000 Alarms menu, press MENU|MENU, select

ALARMS and press ENT. Choose NMEA 2000 ALARMS and press ENT.

1. With the Fluid Level Device window highlighted, press ENT and use

↑ ↓ to select the device you want to monitor, then press ENT.

2. To enable the Full Alarm, highlight FULL ALARM Enabled box and

press ENT to turn on (check) the alarm. Press → to the Percent box and

press ENT. Use the ↑ ↓ keys to select the first number, then press → to

move to the next number. When the desired percentage has been en-

tered, press ENT.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

NMEA 2000 Alarms highlighted on Alarms menu (left). NMEA 2000

Alarms menu (center). Alarm Status page (right).

3. To enable the Empty Alarm, highlight the EMPTY ALARM Enabled box

and press ENT to turn on (check) the alarm. Press → to the Percent box

and press ENT. Use the ↑ ↓ keys to select the first number, then press

→ to move to the next number. When the desired percentage has been

entered, press ENT.

Tip

You do not have to set both the Full and Empty alarms. Choose

both Full and Empty alarms or activate them individually.

Calibrate Speed

The speed sensor can be calibrated to compensate for inaccuracies. Be-

fore you change the setting, first calculate the percentage that the

speed is off. You will enter this percentage in a moment.

If, for example, you figure the sensor is reading 10 percent faster than

actual speed, you will enter – 10 in the calibration window. If the sen-

sor is reading 5 percent slower than true speed, you will enter + 5 in

the window.

Calibrate Water Speed highlighted on Sonar Setup menu (left). Cali-

brate Speed dialog box (right).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

A good way to gauge your speed sensor's performance is to compare its

reading with the ground speed measured by your unit's GPS functions.

When you make a run to compare GPS ground speed to speed sensor

speed, perform your test in relatively calm water free of current, if pos-

sible. (Unless, of course, you are taking the speed of current into con-

sideration when making your calculation.) After you have a correction

figure, here's how to enter it:

1. Press MENU|MENU|↓ to SONAR SETUP|ENT|↓ to CALIBRATE WATER

SPEED|ENT.

2. Enter the number you calculated earlier: press ↑ or ↓ to change the

first character (+ or –), then press → to move the cursor to the next

number and repeat until the percentage is correct, then press EXIT.

Chart Speed

The rate that echoes scroll across the screen is called the chart speed.

The default is maximum; we recommend that you leave the speed set

there for virtually all fishing conditions.

You, however, might consider experimenting with chart speed when

you are stationary or drifting very slowly. You may sometimes achieve

better images as you slow down the chart speed to match how fast you

are moving across the bottom.

If you are at anchor, ice fishing or fishing from a dock, experiment with

a chart speed around 50 percent. If you are drifting slowly, try a chart

speed around 75 percent. When you are stationary and a fish swims

through the sonar signal cone, the image appears on the screen as a

long line instead of a fish arch. Reducing the chart speed may result in

a shorter line that more closely resembles a regular fish return.

Sonar Page menu with Chart Speed command selected (left).

Chart Speed Control Bar (right).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

If you do experiment with chart speed, remember to reset it to maxi-

mum when you resume trolling or moving across the water at higher

speed. To change chart speed:

1. From the Sonar Page, press MENU|↓ to CHART SPEED|ENT.

2. The Chart Speed Control Bar appears. Press ↓ to decrease chart

speed; press ↑ to increase chart speed.

3. When it's set at the desired level, press EXIT.

Colorline™

Colorline lets you distinguish between strong and weak echoes. It

"paints" a brighter color on targets that are stronger than a preset

value. This allows you to tell the difference between a hard and soft

bottom. For example, a soft, muddy or weedy bottom returns a weaker

signal which is shown with a narrow, colored line (dark blue tinged

with red or a little yellow.) Since fish are among the weakest echoes,

they show up mostly as blue arches. A hard bottom or other relatively

hard target returns a strong signal which causes a wider brightly col-

ored line (reddish yellow to bright yellow.)

If you have two signals of equal size, one with red to yellow color and

the other without, then the target with brighter color (yellow) is the

stronger signal. This helps distinguish weeds from trees on the bottom,

or fish from structure.

Colorline is adjustable. Experiment with your unit to find the Color-

Line setting that's best for you.

Sonar Page menu with ColorLine command selected (left).

The Colorline control bar (right).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To adjust Colorline level:

1. From the Sonar Page, press MENU|↓ to COLORLINE|ENT.

2. The ColorLine Control Bar appears. Press ↓ to decrease ColorLine;

press ↑ to increase ColorLine.

3. When it's set at the desired level, press EXIT.

Wider

ColorLine

Thin or no ColorLine

A small amount of Colorline (left) is indicative of a soft bottom. A

wider patch of Colorline indicates a harder bottom (right).

Depth Cursor

The depth cursor consists of a horizontal line with a digital depth box

on the right side. The numbers inside the box show the depth of the

cursor.

Cursor line

Depth box

Sonar Page menu with Depth Cursor selected (left). Sonar chart with

active depth cursor (right). The cursor is set at 34.64 feet deep.

The cursor can be moved to any location on the screen, letting you pin-

point the depth of a target.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1. From the Sonar Page, press MENU|↓ to DEPTH CURSOR|ENT.

2. The depth cursor appears. Press ↓ to lower the cursor line; press ↑ to

raise the cursor line.

3. To clear the depth cursor, press EXIT.

Depth Range - Automatic

When turned on for the first time, the bottom signal is automatically

placed in the lower half of the screen. This is called Auto Ranging and

is part of the automatic function. However, depending upon the bottom

depth and the current range, you can change the range to a different

depth. To do this:

Sonar Page menu with Depth Range selected (left). Depth Range Con-

trol Scale (right).

1. From the Sonar Page, press MENU|↓ to DEPTH RANGE|ENT.

2. The Depth Range Control Scale appears. Press ↑ or ↓ to select a dif-

ferent depth range. A blue bar highlights the selected range. The light

numbers cannot be selected.

3. When the new range is selected, press EXIT to clear the menu.

Depth Range - Manual

You have complete control over the range when the unit is in the man-

ual mode. There are 16 depth ranges, from 5 feet to 4,000 feet.

To switch to Manual Depth Range:

1. First, turn off automatic depth range. From the Sonar Page, press

MENU|↓ to AUTO DEPTH RANGE|ENT.

2. Press ↑ to DEPTH RANGE|ENT and the Depth Range Control Scale ap-

pears.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3. Press ↓ or ↑ to select a different depth range. A horizontal blue bar

highlights the selected range.

4. When the new range is selected, press EXIT to clear the menu. Repeat

these steps to turn on Auto Depth Range.

NOTE:

The sonar's depth capability depends on the water, bottom condi-

tions, transducer installation and other factors.

Depth Range - Upper and Lower Limits

Virtually any segment of the water column can be displayed by using

the upper and lower limit feature. This lets you pick the shallow and

deep depth range limits that are shown on the screen, provided there is

at least 10 feet between the upper and lower limit you select. For ex-

ample, a range from 12 feet to 34 feet could be used.

Changing the upper and lower limits gives you far greater control over

the depth range. This feature lets you "zoom in" the display in almost

unlimited combinations. Nearly any segment of the water column, from

the surface to the bottom can be shown.

Sonar Page Menu with Upper and Lower Limits selected (left). Sonar

Chart Limits menu with Upper Limit selected (right).

To change the upper and lower limits:

1. From the Sonar Page, press MENU|↓ to UPPER AND LOWER LIMITS|ENT.

The Sonar Chart Limits menu appears, with Upper Limit selected.

2. To set the upper limit, press ENT. Press ↑ or ↓ to change the first

number, then press → to move the cursor to the next number and re-

peat until the depth is correct, then press EXIT.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3. To set the lower limit, press ↓ to LOWER LIMIT|ENT. Press ↑ ↓ to change

the first number, then press → to move the cursor to the next number

and repeat until the depth is correct, then press EXIT repeatedly.

Fish arches

Area

"zoomed"

Normal display, in auto depth range mode (left). Display "zoomed" with

Upper and Lower Limits focusing on the portion of the water column

from 20 feet to 40 feet deep (right). In the "zoomed" image, note the target

definition at lower left, showing a fish holding just above the structure.

To turn off upper and lower limits:

From the Sonar Page, press MENU|↓ to AUTO DEPTH RANGE|ENT|EXIT.

FasTrack™

This feature automatically converts all echoes to short horizontal lines

on the display's far right side. The graph on the rest of the screen con-

tinues to operate normally. FasTrack gives you a rapid update of condi-

tions directly under the boat. This makes it useful for ice fishing, or

when you are fishing at anchor. When the boat is not moving, fish sig-

nals are long, drawn out lines on a normal chart display. FasTrack con-

verts the graph to a vertical bar graph that, with practice, makes a use-

ful addition to fishing at a stationary location.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Surface clutter

Structure

Fish arches

In FasTrack, fish

arches show as

horizontal bars.

Bottom signal

FasTrack

bar graph

Sonar Page showing FasTrack.

Fish I.D.™ (Fish Symbols & Depths)

The Fish I.D. feature identifies targets that meet certain conditions as

fish. The microcomputer analyzes all echoes and eliminates surface

clutter, thermoclines, and other signals that are undesirable. In most

instances, remaining targets are fish. The Fish I.D. feature displays

fish symbols on the screen in place of the actual fish echoes.

There are several fish symbol sizes. These are used to designate the

relative size between targets. In other words, Fish I.D. displays a small

fish symbol when it thinks a target is a small fish, a medium fish sym-

bol on a larger target and so on.

The sonar's microcomputer is sophisticated, but it can be fooled. It can't

distinguish between fish and other suspended objects such as trotlines,

turtles, submerged floats, air bubbles, etc. Individual tree limbs ex-

tending outwards from a group of limbs is the hardest object for the

Fish I.D. feature to distinguish from fish.

You may see fish symbols on the screen when actually, there are no

fish. The reverse is also true. The illustrations on the next page show

how Fish I.D. can actually miss fish that are present.

Does that mean Fish I.D. is broken? No — the feature is simply inter-

preting sonar returns in a specific way to help take some of the work

out of reading the screen. Remember: Fish I.D. is one of the many tools

we provide so you can analyze your sonar returns for maximum fish

finding information. This and other features can help you successfully

"see" beneath the boat under varied water and fishing conditions. So,

practice with the unit in both the Fish I.D. mode and without to become

more familiar with the feature. The default for Fish I.D. is off.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Sonar Features menu with Fish I.D. Symbols selected on dual-

frequency menu (left); single-frequency menu (right). When the check

box to the left is checked, the feature is on.

Fig. 1 A

Fig. 1 B

Many fish

Fewer fish

arches visible

symbols visible

Fig. 2 A

Fig. 2 B

Fish arches

above structure

No fish shown

FasTrack graph

confirms fish

Figures 1A and 2A show Sonar Page in normal chart mode (left). Figures

1B and 2B (right) show the same underwater scene with Fish I.D. turned

on. Note how arches are replaced with symbols.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To turn the Fish I.D. feature on:

1. From the Sonar Page, press MENU|↓ to SONAR FEATURES|ENT.

2. Press → to FISH SYMBOLS|ENT|EXIT|EXIT.

To turn off Fish I.D., repeat the instructions in step 2.

FishTrack™

The FishTrack feature shows the depth of a fish symbol when it ap-

pears on the display. This lets you accurately gauge the depth of tar-

gets. This feature is available only when the Fish I.D. feature is on. The

default setting for FishTrack is off.

To turn on FishTrack:

(Note: These instructions will turn on FishTrack and Fish I.D. at the

same time.)

1. From the Sonar Page, press MENU|↓ to SONAR FEATURES|ENT.

2. Press →|then press ↓ to FISH DEPTHS|ENT|EXIT|EXIT.

To turn off FishTrack, repeat the instructions in step 1. Turning off

FishTrack in this manner will not turn off Fish I.D. symbols.

Symbols with

FishTrack depths

Sonar Features menu with Fish I.D. Depths selected on dual-frequency

menu (left). When the check box to the left is checked, the feature is on.

Sonar Page with Fish I.D. symbols and FishTrack depths turned on

(right).

Frequency (Change Transducer Frequency)

(LMS-527cDF only)

The LMS-527cDF transducer can operate at both 200 kHz and 50 kHz.

The 200 kHz frequency has a 12° cone angle and the 50 kHz frequency

has a 35° cone angle.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The default frequency is 200 kHz, which is best for use in shallow wa-

ter (about 300 feet or less). This frequency is the best choice for about

80 percent of the fresh and salt water sport fishing applications. When

you get into very deep salt water, 300 to 500 feet or deeper, the 50 kHz

frequency is the best choice.

The 200 kHz transducer will give you better detail and definition, but

less depth penetration. The 50 kHz transducer will give you greater

depth penetration, but a little less detail and less definition. (Remember,

all sonar units typically read deeper in fresh water than in salt water.)

There is a common exception to these rules of thumb. Some fishermen

on freshwater lakes (or the ocean) using downriggers like to see them

on the sonar. In many of those cases, you'll see a 50 kHz transducer

frequency in use because the wider cone angle lets them watch the bait.

Sonar Features menu with a frequency of 200 kHz selected.

To change the frequency setting to 50 kHz:

1. From the Sonar Page, press MENU|↓ to SONAR FEATURES|ENT.

2. Press →|then press ↓ to 50 KHZ|ENT.

3. Press EXIT|EXIT to clear the menu.

To change the frequency setting to 200 kHz:

1. From the Sonar Page, press MENU|↓ to SONAR FEATURES|ENT.

2. Press →|then press ↓ to 200 KHZ|ENT.

3. Press EXIT|EXIT to clear the menu.

HyperScroll™

See the entry on Ping Speed, which controls the HyperScroll feature.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Log Sonar Chart Data

If you have an MMC installed in the unit, the sonar data shown on the

screen can be saved to the MMC. This can be played back at any time

(to play a recorded sonar chart log, see the entry in this section for So-

nar Simulator). If you have a personal computer and Internet access,

visit our web site, www.lowrance.com, and download the free Sonar

Viewer and the emulator for your unit. These programs will allow you

to replay sonar logs on your personal computer.

Sonar Page menu with the Log Sonar Chart Data selected (left). Sonar

Chart Logging menu (right) with the Start Logging selected. The menu

says the MMC has 5.42 MB of free space, which will record the scroll-

ing chart for 28 minutes and 44 seconds.

To record or log chart data:

1. Press MENU|↓ to LOG SONAR CHART DATA|ENT.

2. To record data using the default settings, press ENT. The menu clears

and the Sonar Page title bar shows the name of the file you are re-

cording. Warning messages will appear as recording time begins to run

out.

NOTE:

You can change any of the settings by using the cursor arrows to

highlight different commands. Select FILE NAME if you want to

change the name. Select CHART QUALITY if you want to lower the file

quality and record for a longer period of time. After you've changed

the settings, select START LOGGING and press ENT.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Noise Rejection

See the entry on Advanced Signal Processing in this section.

Overlay Data

On any Page display except Satellite Status, you can "float" or overlay

additional GPS or navigation data on the screen with the Overlay Data

command. For example, if you left your watch at home, you could dis-

play the local time on top of the map. Or, if you wanted to see details

about your route and trip, you could show your bearing, course, average

speed and trip distance.

The various data available from your unit are divided into categories in

the Overlay Data menu. These categories include GPS Data, Naviga-

tion, Trip Calculator, Time, Sonar Data and Miscellaneous Data.

You can select items from any of these categories for display, in any

combination — the category divisions are there only to help you sort

through the information.

Overlay Data highlighted on sonar menu (left). Overlay Data Shown

menu (right).

To overlay information on your screen:

1. Press MENU|↓ to OVERLAY DATA|ENT.

2. If you currently have any overlay data on your screen, it will be

listed here. Select (ENTER TO ADD) and press ENT. The data viewer shows

information categories with "+" or "–" symbols next to each category

name. A category with a "+" next to it is expandable, meaning its con-

tents are hidden.

Selecting the category name and pressing ENT will show the category's

contents, so you can choose items within it. An expanded category (one

with a "–" next to its name) can be collapsed to hide its contents. Just

select the category name and press ENT.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Data Viewer menu (left). Sonar Data category expanded (right).

3. Expand any categories that might contain data you want to display.

Then press ↓ or ↑ to select a data option.

4. With the data option highlighted, press ENT to check it (turn on) and

uncheck it (turn off). As you turn it on, the data will appear on top of

the screen. Every Page display has a maximum number of items you

can show using the Overlay Data command.

5. After the desired changes are made, press EXIT|EXIT to return to the

page display.

Steering

arrow

Map Page showing boat cruising Puget Sound, Washington (left) with

Overlay Data turned on. This example shows Depth, Ground Speed

and the Steering Arrow. Note that the Steering Arrow always points

directly to the destination you are navigating toward. In this case, the

boater is headed on a northwesterly course of 275º. Since the helms-

man is on course, the Steering Arrow is pointing straight ahead. If the

boat veered off course, the arrow would show which direction to steer

to get back on course. Sonar Page with Overlay Data turned on (right),

showing Depth, Ground Speed and the Track the boat is following.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To remove overlaid data:

1. While on the Page that shows the item or items you want to remove,

press MENU|↓ to OVERLAY DATA|ENT.

2. You'll see a list of the overlay data currently displayed. Select the

item you want to remove from your display and press ENT|ENT to re-

move the data. To remove another item, select the item and press

ENT|ENT.

3. When you have finished removing all the items you want from the

screen, press EXIT to return to the page display.

NOTE

You can also remove data directly from the Data Viewer menu by un-

checking the data option you would like to remove.

Overlay Data Shown with Water Temp selected (left). Remove button

highlighted (center). Water Temp has been removed from Overlay

Data Shown menu (right).

To move overlaid data:

You may find it useful to rearrange data that is floating in your display

window.

1. From one of the Map Pages, press MENU|↓ to OVERLAY DATA|ENT.

2. You'll see a list of the overlay data currently displayed. Select the

item you want to move and press ENT|→ to MOVE|ENT.

3. The data begins to flash on your screen. Use any combination of →,

←, ↑ and ↓ to move the data to a new location on the screen.

4. When satisfied, press EXIT|EXIT.

NOTE:

The Customize command and the Overlay Data command both use

the same information categories. The difference between the two

commands is that Customize changes only the data boxes on a

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

screen, and Overlay Data changes only the information floating on

the screen without a box. See Customize Page Displays, on page 86,

for information on customizing data boxes.

To change displayed data font size:

1. From the Map or Sonar page, press MENU|↓ to OVERLAY DATA|ENT.

2. Press ↓ or ↑ to select Data Type, then use ← → to scroll through the

five overlay options: Off, Small, Medium, Large and Enormous.

3. Select the desired setting. The selected data type will be displayed in

the new size. To change the font size for another Data Type, repeat

Steps 2 and 3. Press EXIT to return to the sonar display.

NOTE:

Some data types can be displayed in only one font size. If that is the

case, the Data Size box will not be displayed for that data type.

Ping Speed & HyperScroll™

Ping Speed controls the rate at which the transmitter and transducer

broadcast sonar sound waves — pings — into the water. The unit has a

default ping speed of 50 percent. At normal boating speeds, this auto-

matically provides enough return echoes to refresh the screen and

scroll the chart at maximum chart speed.

However, when you are running at high speeds, or just want the fastest

possible screen update, you may want to use the HyperScroll™ feature.

When you change the Ping Speed to any setting greater than 50 per-

cent, the unit automatically enters HyperScroll mode.

These faster ping rates allow you to maintain a high-detail picture on

the screen, and the screen refresh rate and chart scroll speed can keep

pace with the boat as it moves quickly over the bottom terrain.

When using HyperScroll, you may also need to manually decrease the

sensitivity for optimum performance. Depending on water depth and

other conditions, HyperScroll may cause a second bottom echo to return

to the transducer during the next ping cycle, or sounding. This can result

in a large amount of clutter appearing on the screen. If this occurs, just

decrease the sensitivity to a level that eliminates the clutter. When you

turn HyperScroll off, you can return to your original sensitivity level.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Sonar Menu with Ping Speed selected (left).

Ping Speed Control Bar set to its default setting (right).

To change Ping Speed:

1. From the Sonar Page, press MENU|↓ to PING SPEED|ENT.

2. The Ping Speed Control Bar appears. Press ↑ to increase ping speed;

press ↓ to decrease speed. When it's set at the desired level, press EXIT.

To adjust Sensitivity:

1. From the Sonar Page, press MENU|ENT.

2. The Sensitivity Control Bar appears. Press ↓ to decrease sensitivity;

press ↑ to increase sensitivity. When it's set at the desired level, press

EXIT. (When you reach the maximum or minimum limit, a tone sounds.)

To turn off HyperScroll:

1. From the Sonar Page, press MENU|↓ to PING SPEED|ENT.

2. The Ping Speed Control Bar appears. Press ↓ to decrease ping speed

to 50 percent. When it's set at the desired level, press EXIT.

When you boost ping speed and switch into HyperScroll, the width of

the FasTrack bar graph display doubles in width at the right side of the

screen. This allows you to better see the virtually instantaneous sonar

returns, just as you would on a flasher sonar unit. For more informa-

tion on FasTrack, see its entry in this section.

Reset Options

This command is used to reset all features, options and settings to their

original factory defaults. This is useful when you have changed several

settings and want to return the unit to basic automatic operation.

2. Press ← to YES|ENT.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3. All the menus are cleared and the unit reverts to the Map Page at

the 4000 mile zoom range, just as if you had turned it on for the first

time. All options have been returned to the factory settings.

System Setup menu with Reset Options selected (left). The Reset Op-

tions dialog box, with "Yes" selected (right).

NOTE:

Reset Options does not erase any waypoints, routes, plot trails, or

sonar logs.

Reset Water Distance

The sonar chart's Digital Data display option includes a box that shows

distance traveled, called Water Distance. This information is calculated

from an optional water speed sensor, not the GPS. The Water Distance

window can be reset to zero using the Reset Water Distance command.

Press MENU|MENU|↓ to SONAR SETUP|ENT|↓ to RESET WATER DIS-

^TANCE|ENT. The menus are cleared and the water distance is reset to 0.00.

Set Keel Offset

This unit measures water depth from the face of the transducer. Since

the transducer is installed below the water surface, the distance dis-

played by the digital depth, chart depth scale, chart cursor or fish sym-

bols is not the exact water depth. If the transducer is 1 foot below the

surface, and the screen shows the water depth as 30 feet, then the ac-

tual depth is 31 feet.

On sailboats or other large vessels with deep drafts, the distance be-

tween the transducer installation and the keel or lower engine unit can

be several feet. In those cases, an inexact depth reading could result in

grounding or striking underwater structure.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The Keel Offset feature eliminates the need for the navigator to men-

tally calculate how much water is under his keel.

Keel Offset lets you calibrate the digital depth, chart depth scale, chart

cursor depth and fish symbol depth displayed on the screen. To calibrate

the depth indicators, first measure the distance from the face of the

transducer to the lowest part of the boat. In this example, we will use 3.5

feet. This will entered as a negative 3.5 feet, which makes the depth indi-

cators perform as if the transducer's lower in the water than it really is.

1. Press MENU|MENU|↓ to Sonar Setup ENT. Use ↓ to select SET KEEL

OFFSET|ENT.

2. The Keel Offset dialog box appears. Press ↓ to change the plus (+)

sign to a minus (–) sign.

3. Press → to the first number, then press ↑ to change the number to 3

4. Press → to the second number, then press ↑ to change the number to

5, then press EXIT. The depth indicators now accurately show the depth

of water beneath the keel.

NOTE:

If knowing the exact depth of water beneath the keel is less impor-

tant, you can calibrate the depth indicators so that they show the ac-

tual water depth from surface to bottom. To do this, first measure the

distance from the face of the transducer up to the surface (the water

line on the boat). In this example, we will use 1.5 feet. This will be en-

tered as a positive 1.5 feet, which makes the depth indicators perform

as if the transducer's higher in the water than it really is.

1. Press MENU|MENU|↓ to Sonar Setup ENT. Use ↓ to select SET KEEL

OFFSET|ENT.

2. The Keel Offset dialog box appears with a plus (+) sign at the

front of the box.

3. Press → to the first number, then press ↑ to change the number

to 1.

4. Press → to the second number, them press ↑ to change the num-

ber to 5, then press EXIT. The depth indicators now accurately show

the water depth from surface to bottom.

Sensitivity & Auto Sensitivity

The sensitivity controls the ability of the unit to pick up echoes. Sensi-

tivity can be adjusted, because water conditions vary greatly. A low

sensitivity level (from zero to 50 percent) excludes much of the bottom

information, fish signals, and other target information.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

High sensitivity levels let you see this detail, but it can also clutter the

screen with many undesired signals. Typically, the best sensitivity level

shows a good solid bottom signal with Colorline and some surface clutter.

Automatic Sensitivity

The default sensitivity mode is automatic. The unit bases the sensitiv-

ity level on water depth and conditions. When the unit is in the auto-

matic mode, sensitivity is automatically adjusted to keep a solid bottom

signal displayed, plus a little more power. This gives it the capability to

show fish and other detail.

However, situations occur when it becomes necessary to increase or

decrease the sensitivity. This typically happens when you wish to see

more detail, so an increase in sensitivity is indicated. Or, wave action

and boat wakes can create enough tiny air bubbles to clutter much of

the water column. In that case, a decrease in sensitivity is indicated to

reduce some of the clutter.

The control bar used to adjust sensitivity up or down is the same

whether the unit is in the automatic or manual mode. In automatic you

can adjust sensitivity up to 100 percent but the unit will limit your

minimum setting. In auto, the unit will continue to make small ad-

justments, allowing for the setting you selected.

In manual mode, you have complete control over sensitivity, with the

ability to set it anywhere from zero to 100 percent. Once you select a

level in manual, the unit will continue to use that exact sensitivity set-

ting until you change it or revert to auto mode.

To adjust sensitivity in auto mode:

1. Press MENU|ENT.

2. The Sensitivity Control Bar appears. Press ↓ to decrease sensitivity;

press ↑ to increase sensitivity. When it's set at the desired level, press

EXIT. (When you reach the maximum or minimum limit, a tone sounds.)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Sonar Menu with Sensitivity selected (left). The Sensitivity Control

Bar (right).

To adjust sensitivity in manual mode:

1. First, turn off Auto Sensitivity: from the Sonar Page, press MENU|↓

to AUTO SENSITIVITY|ENT.

2. Press ↑ to SENSITIVITY|ENT and the Sensitivity Control Bar appears.

Press ↓ or ↑ to pick a different sensitivity setting. When it's set at the

desired level, press EXIT.

To turn Auto Sensitivity back on:

From the Sonar Page, press MENU|↓ to AUTO SENSITIVITY|ENT|EXIT.

NOTE:

To return to the original factory setting for Auto Sensitivity, see the

entry in this section on Reset Options. If sensitivity is in manual

mode, the Reset Options command will switch back to Auto and re-

set the factory setting at the same time.

Tip:

For quicker sensitivity adjustments, try leaving the Sensitivity

Control Bar on the screen as the chart scrolls. You can see the

changes on the screen as you press the up or down arrows. This is

handy when there's a lot of clutter in the water, and you are match-

ing the sensitivity to rapidly changing water conditions.

Sonar Chart Mode

The default color scheme for the sonar chart is the white background,

but we offer other variations to suit your viewing preferences. The

chart can be displayed in grayscale, reverse grayscale, blue back-

ground, white background, nightview, iceview, or bottom color tracking.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To change the chart mode color scheme:+

1. From the Sonar Page, press MENU|↓ to SONAR FEATURES|ENT.

2. Press ↓ to SONAR CHART MODE|ENT.

3. Press ↓ or ↑ to Mode Name|ENT.

4. Press EXIT|EXIT to return to the Sonar Page.

Sonar Page & Sonar Chart Display Options

The Pages Menu offers five chart display options for dual-frequency mod-

els and four options for single-frequency models. To access them, press

PAGES|← or→ to SONAR|↓ to Option Name|EXIT.

Pages Menu showing sonar chart display options.

Full Sonar Chart

This is the default mode used when the unit is turned on for the first

time or when it's reset to the factory defaults.

The bottom signal scrolls across the screen from right to left. Depth

scales on the right side of the screen aid in determining the depth of

targets. The line at the top of the screen represents the surface. The

bottom depth and surface temperature (if equipped with a temperature

sensor or a transducer with a temp sensor built in) show at the top left

corner of the screen.

The FasTrack™ display shows just to the right of the scale. This

changes all echoes into short horizontal bars, replicating a flasher so-

nar. The zoom bar on the far right shows the area that's zoomed when

the zoom is in use. (See the Zoom section for more information.)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Full Sonar Chart. The Overlay Data (depth and water temperature)

are both set to the small text size.

Split Zoom Sonar Chart

A split chart shows the underwater world from the surface to the bot-

tom on the right side of the screen. The left side shows an enlarged ver-

sion of the right side. The zoom range shows in the bottom left corner.

Split Zoom Sonar Chart. The left window is zoomed 2X in the first im-

age (left). The left window is zoomed 4X in the second image (right).

Split Frequency Sonar Chart

(LMS-527cDF only)

This page shows sonar data from the 50 kHz transducer on the left side

of the screen and data from the 200 kHz transducer on the right side.

All other functions and features are the same as the Full Chart page.

You can adjust the sensitivity in each window.

To adjust sensitivity in auto mode:

1. Press MENU|ENT.

2. The unit asks which window (50kHz or 200kHz) you would like to

adjust. Press ← or→ to select the one you want | ENT.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3. The Sensitivity Control Bar appears. Press ↓ to decrease sensitivity;

press ↑ to increase sensitivity. When it's set at the desired level, press

EXIT. (When you reach the maximum or minimum limit, a tone sounds.)

The Split Frequency Sonar Chart page allows you to adjust

sensitivity separately for each window.

Digital Data/Chart

This mode shows the chart on the right side of the screen. The left side has

five digital data boxes containing: Water Depth; Water Speed (from an op-

tional speed sensor); Water Distance (distance traveled or log, it also re-

quires a speed sensor); Surface Water Temperature and Voltage.

Digital Data/Chart

Customize Page Displays

Every Page display option except Full Map (on the Map Page) has cus-

tomizable data boxes to provide constant on-screen information.

The data available from your unit is divided into categories in the Data

Viewer menu. These categories include GPS Data, Navigation, Trip

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Calculator, Time, Sonar Data and Miscellaneous Data. You can select

items from any of these categories for display in any data box — the

category divisions are only there to help you sort through the informa-

tion.

To change the information displayed in a data box:

1. On the Page display you wish to change, press MENU|↓ to CUSTOM-

IZE|ENT. A data box name flashes, indicating it is selected.

2. Press ENT to change the box or hit ↑, ↓, → or ← to select another box,

then press ENT. You'll see a list of categories with "+" or "–" symbols

next to each category. A category with a "+" is expandable, meaning its

contents are hidden.

Customize Menu, with "GPS Data" and "Navigation" categories expanded.

3. Selecting the category name and pressing ENT will show the cate-

gory's contents, so you can choose items within it. An expanded cate-

gory (one with a "–" next to its name) can be collapsed to hide its con-

tents. Just select the category name and press ENT.

4. Expand any categories that might contain data you want to display.

Then press ↓ ↑ to select a different data option.

5. With the new option highlighted, press ENT to switch the contents of

the box to the new data type, then press EXIT.

6. You can now select another box to change. When you are finished

with the settings, press EXIT again to end the Customize command, and

the box name stops flashing.

A Page display can show a limited number of data boxes. You can not

turn them off or add more data boxes.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Flasher

The Flasher sonar page option represents a flasher style sonar com-

bined with a scrolling chart. A circular dial shows all returning echoes

at a high screen refresh rate. It uses the Colorline feature to show

weaker targets as lighter colors. The bottom depth is also shown as a

black bar across the outer circle. You can adjust the size of the chart

and the flasher windows by using the Resize Window command, which

is described in Sec. 6.

Surface clutter

Bottom signal

Fish signal,

approximately

Fish signal,

approximately

22 feet

11 feet

Flasher page.

Sonar with Custom Gauges

The Sonar with Custom Gauges page has a split screen with sonar on

the right side, digital gauge information on the left side. The two win-

dows can be resized to make one side bigger than the other or may be

set up to split the screen evenly.

Sonar with Custom Gauges selected on the Pages menu (left). To

change custom gauge information, access overlay data on the Custom

Gauges menu (center). Overlay Data shown menu (right).

To customize digital gauge display:

1. Press PAGES, highlight SONAR WITH CUSTOM GAUGES and press ENT.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2. Press MENU, select OVERLAY DATA and press ENT. The Overlay Data

shown menu will appear.

3. Highlight (PRESS ENT TO ADD…) and press ENT to open the Data Viewer

menu with three expandable data categories: Time, Sonar Data and

Sensor Data.

4. Highlight the desired data category and press ENT, which will ex-

pand the list, revealing several subcategories with checkboxes next to

them.

5. Select the desired subcategory and press ENT, which will place a

checkmark in the checkbox, showing the selected data is set for display.

6. If you want to display other data types, repeat Steps 4 and 5. Press

EXIT repeatedly to get back to the Sonar with Custom Gauges page. The

data you selected will now be displayed in the gray area on the left side

of the screen.

To change Overlay data size:

1. From the Sonar with Custom Gauges page, press MENU SELECT OVER-

LAY DATA and press ENT. The Overlay Data Shown menu will appear.

2. Highlight the Data Type you want to resize, then use ← → to set the

data to the desired size to one of four options: Off, Small, Medium,

Large and Enormous.

Local Time is set to medium size (left). The size of Local Time data has

been changed to Enormous (right).

3. To change the size of another Data Type, repeat the steps above. To

return to the Sonar with Custom Gauges display, press EXIT.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To resize Sonar and Custom Gauge windows:

1. From the Sonar with Custom Gauges page, press MENU, select RESIZE

WINDOW and press ENT.

2. Use ← → to increase or decrease the size of each window. Press EXIT.

When the Resize Windows command is active, two arrows will appear

between the two windows.

Map with Sonar Split Screen

There is a page mode that splits the screen in half, with the map on the

left and the sonar on the right. This screen option can be found on the

Pages Menu under the Map Page category.

Full Map page (left). Pages Menu with the Map option list (center). The

Map with Sonar screen (right).

When the split screen is activated, you need to specify which side of the

display is the active menu. To do this, press PAGES|PAGES. The window

with the blue title bar at the top of the screen is the active window. To

switch back, just press PAGES|PAGES again.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Sonar Simulator

This unit has a built-in simulator that lets you run it as if you were on

the water. All sonar features and functions are useable. When in simu-

lator mode, you will see the chart file name in the Sonar Page title bar

and a play symbol will flash on and off at the right end of the title bar.

To use the simulator:

1. From the Sonar Page, press MENU|MENU|↓ to SYSTEM SETUP|ENT|↓

to SIMULATORS|ENT.

System Setup menu with Simulators selected (left). Sonar Simulator

page with Sonar Simulator On highlighted (right). The checkbox next

Sonar Simulator On is checked (turned on).

NOTE:

With Simulate Position checked, the simulator will automatically run

the GPS simulator (if GPS data was recorded with the sonar log).

2. Press → to highlight SONAR SIMULATOR tab. To turn on the simulator,

highlight SONAR SIMULATOR ON and press ENT, which will place an X in the

checkbox. Repeat these steps to turn off the simulator.

3. Press EXIT repeatedly to return to the main display.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

"Play"

symbol

flashing

Title bar with

chart file name

Sonar Page, playing a recorded sonar chart in Sonar Simulator mode.

Tip:

The Sonar Simulator can use sonar charts that you or a friend have

recorded (logged) on a MMC card. (To see how, read the entry in

this section on Log Sonar Chart Data.) To play back your own sonar

chart, make sure the MMC containing the chart is installed, then:

1. Press MENU|MENU|↓ to SONAR SETUP|ENT|↓ to SONAR SIMULA-

TOR|ENT.

2. Press ↓ to CHART USED|ENT.

3. Press ↓ or ↑ to select chart name|ENT|↑ to SONAR SIMULATOR

ON|ENT|EXIT.

While you're in the Sonar Simulator menu, don't forget to check

Simulate Position if you want to run the sonar and GPS simulators

simultaneously. As you review sonar logs, you can create waypoints

to mark the sites you want to revisit.

While the simulator is running, you can switch from one chart log

to another by opening the Sonar Simulator menu and using the in-

structions in step 2 to select a different chart.

Tip:

There's more than one way to play a recorded sonar chart. You can

also turn on the simulator from the MMC files list. Here's how:

1. Press MENU|MENU|↓ to BROWSE MMC FILES|ENT|ENT.

2. Press ↓ ↑ to file name|ENT|↓ to PLAY|ENT|EXIT.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Select Browse MMC Files from the Main Menu.

NOTE:

If you turn on your unit before attaching a transducer, it may enter a

demo mode. The words "demo mode" flash on the bottom of the

screen and a sonar chart plays much like the simulator. Unlike the

simulator, the demo mode is for demonstration only, and will auto-

matically stop as soon as you turn on the unit with a transducer at-

tached. The simulator will continue to function normally.

Stop Chart

If you are running multiple units on a boat or using this unit in a car,

there are times when you may want to turn off the sonar. This com-

mand turns off the sonar and stops the chart from scrolling. Sonar re-

starts automatically each time you turn on your unit.

1. From a Sonar Page, press MENU|↓ to STOP CHART|ENT|EXIT. Repeat

this step to restart the chart.

Sonar Menu with Stop Chart command selected. The box is unchecked,

indicating that the chart is scrolling across the screen.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Surface Clarity

The markings extending downward from the zero line on the chart are

called "surface clutter." These markings are caused by wave action,

boat wakes, temperature inversion and more.

The surface clarity control reduces or eliminates surface clutter signals

from the display. It does this by changing the sensitivity of the receiver,

decreasing it near the surface and gradually increasing it as the depth

increases.

There are three levels of surface clarity available: low, medium, or

high. It can also be turned off. The default level is off.

To adjust the Surface Clarity level:

1. From the Sonar Page, press MENU|↓ to SONAR FEATURES|ENT.

Sonar Features menu with Surface Clarity selected.

2. Press ↓ to SURFACE CLARITY|ENT.

3. Press ↓ or ↑ to select clarity level|EXIT|EXIT|EXIT.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Surface clutter

In the illustration at left, Surface Clarity is turned off.

The right view shows Surface Clarity set at High.

Transparency

Use the transparency menu to adjust the transparency of menu win-

dows. A high transparency allows you to continue monitoring the

screen's display while adjusting feature settings, though the text of the

menus may fade until it is unreadable. A low transparency will usually

make menu text easier to read, at the cost of watching your display.

Experiment with this feature until you find the right level of transpar-

ency for your eyes.

Main Menu with Transparency command selected. Transparency con-

trol bar (right).

To adjust Menu Transparency level:

Press MENU|MENU|↓ to TRANSPARENCY|ENT. The TRANSPARENCY slider bar

appears. Press ↑ or ↓ to move the bar. The lower end of the scale makes

the menus opaque; the upper end is maximum transparency.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Upper and Lower Limits

See the entry in this section for Depth Range - Upper and Lower Limits

Zoom & Zoom Bar

"Zooming" the display is a common, fast and easy method used to en-

large small detail, fish signals and the bottom with its associated struc-

ture. This unit lets you zoom the display quickly and easily by pressing

the Zoom In key, ZIN.

Pressing ZIN once doubles the size (2X) of all echoes on the screen.

Pressing it again quadruples the size of the echoes (4X). The zoom bar

on the far right side of the screen shows which echoes will be displayed

on the screen when the ZIN key is pressed.

For example, pressing the ZIN key once will enable a 2X zoom which

will show all echoes that are between the top and bottom of the 2X

zoom bar. Pressing the key again will give a 4X zoom and only the ech-

oes between the top and bottom of the 4X bar will show on the screen.

Press the Zoom Out key, ZOUT, to return the display to the normal mode.

Sonar Page with a normal view (left). The second image (center) is

showing the same view zoomed 2X. The third image (right) is showing

the same view zoomed 4X

Zoom Pan

Your unit has the handy ability to quickly zoom in on any portion of the

water column with just the touch of an arrow key. The Zoom Pan feature

lets you rapidly move the zoomed area up and down to different depths.

By "pointing" your zoom at different portions of the chart as it scrolls, you

can get a good, close-up look at structure or cover below you.

To use Zoom Pan, switch to a manual depth Range setting (see page 67)

and turn on 2X or 4X Zoom. Then, simply press ↑ ↓ to pan up and down

the water column.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Section 5: Sonar Troubleshooting

If your unit is not working, or if you need technical help, please use the

following troubleshooting section before contacting the customer ser-

vice department. It may save you the trouble of returning your unit for

repair. For contact information, refer to the last page, just inside the

back cover of this manual.

Unit won't turn on

1. Check the power cable's connection at the unit. Also check the wiring.

2. Make sure the power cable is wired properly. The red wire connects

to the positive battery terminal, black to negative or ground.

3. Check the fuse.

4. Measure the battery voltage at the unit's power connector. It should

be at least 10 volts. If it isn't, the wiring to the unit is defective, the

battery terminals or wiring on the terminals are corroded, or the bat-

tery needs charging.

Unit freezes, locks up, or operates erratically

1. Electrical noise from the boat's motor, trolling motor, or an accessory

may be interfering with the sonar unit. Rerouting the power and trans-

ducer cables away from other electrical wiring on the boat may help.

Route the sonar unit's power cable directly to the battery instead of

through a fuse block or ignition switch

2. Inspect the transducer cable for breaks, cuts, or pinched wires.

3. Check the transducer and power connector. Make sure it's securely

plugged in to the unit.

Weak bottom echo, digital readings erratic, or no fish signals

1. Make sure the transducer is pointing straight down. Clean the face of

the transducer. Oil, dirt and fuel can cause a film to form on the trans-

ducer, reducing its effectiveness. If the transducer is mounted inside the

hull, be sure it is shooting through only one layer of fiberglass and that it

is securely bonded to the hull. When attaching a transducer to the inside

of a hull, ONLY use the epoxy available from LEI (order information is

inside the back cover). Do NOT use RTV silicone rubber adhesive or any

other type of epoxy. The LEI epoxy is specially formulated so that it will

cure properly for shoot-through applications.

2. Electrical noise from the boat's motor can interfere with the sonar.

This causes the sonar to automatically increase its discrimination or

noise rejection feature. This can cause the unit to eliminate weaker sig-

nals such as fish or even structure from the display.

3. The water may be deeper than the sonar's ability to find the bottom.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

If the sonar can't find the bottom signal while it's in the automatic

mode, the digital sonar display will flash continuously. It may change

the range to limits far greater than the water you are in. If this hap-

pens, place the unit in the manual mode, then change the range to a

realistic one, (for example, 0-100 feet) and increase the sensitivity. As

you move into shallower water, a bottom signal should appear.

4. Check the battery voltage. If the voltage drops, the unit's transmitter

power also drops, reducing its ability to find the bottom or targets.

Bottom echo disappears at high speeds or erratic digital read-

ing or weak bottom echo while boat is moving

1. The transducer may be in turbulent water. It must be mounted in a

smooth flow of water in order for the sonar to work at all boat speeds. Air

bubbles in the water disrupt the sonar signals, interfering with its ability

to find the bottom or other targets. The technical term for this is cavita-

tion.

2. Electrical noise from the boat's motor can interfere with the sonar.

This causes the sonar to automatically increase its discrimination or

noise rejection feature. This can cause the unit to eliminate weaker sig-

nals such as fish or even structure from the display. Try using resistor

spark plugs or routing the sonar unit's power and transducer cables

away from other electrical wiring on the boat.

No fish arches when the Fish I.D. feature is off

1. Make sure the transducer is pointing straight down. This is the most

common problem if a partial arch is displayed.

2. The sensitivity may not be high enough. In order for the unit to dis-

play a fish arch, it has to be able to receive the fish's echo from the time

it enters the cone until it leaves. If the sensitivity is not high enough,

the unit shows the fish only when it is in the center of the cone.

3. Use the Zoom feature. It is much easier to display fish arches when

zoomed in on a small range of water than a large one. For example, you

will have much better luck seeing fish arches with a 30 to 60 foot range

than a 0 to 60 foot range. This enlarges the targets, allowing the dis-

play to show much more detail.

4. The boat must be moving at a slow trolling speed to see fish arches.

If the boat is motionless, fish stay in the cone, showing on the screen as

straight horizontal lines.

NOISE

A major cause of sonar problems is electrical noise. This usually ap-

pears on the sonar's display as random patterns of dots or lines. In se-

vere cases, it can completely cover the screen with black dots, or cause

the unit to operate erratically, or not at all.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To eliminate or minimize the effects of electrical noise, first try to de-

termine the cause. With the boat at rest in the water, the first thing

you should do is turn all electrical equipment on the boat off. Make

sure the engine is also off. Turn your sonar on, then turn off Noise Re-

ject [also known as the ASP feature (Advanced Signal Processing)].

Sensitivity should be set at 90-95 percent. There should be a steady

bottom signal on the display. Now turn on each piece of electrical

equipment on the boat and view the effect on the sonar's display. For

example, turn on the bilge pump and view the sonar display for noise.

If no noise is present, turn the pump off, then turn on the VHF radio

and transmit. Keep doing this until all electrical equipment has been

turned on, their effect on the sonar display noted, then turned off.

If you find noise interference from an electrical instrument, trolling

motor, pump, or radio, try to isolate the problem. You can usually re-

route the sonar unit's power cable and transducer cable away from the

wiring that is causing the interference. VHF radio antenna cables radi-

ate noise when transmitting, so be sure to keep the sonar's wires away

from it. You may need to route the sonar unit's power cable directly to

the battery to isolate it from other wiring on the boat.

If no noise displays on the sonar unit from electrical equipment, then

make sure everything except the sonar unit is turned off, then start the

engine. Increase the RPM with the gearshift in neutral. If noise ap-

pears on the display, the problem could be one of three things; spark

plugs, alternator, or tachometer wiring. Try using resistor spark plugs,

alternator filters, or routing the sonar unit's power cable away from

engine wiring. Again, routing the power cable directly to the battery

helps eliminate noise problems. Make sure to use the in-line fuse sup-

plied with the unit when wiring the power cable to the battery.

When no noise appears on the sonar unit after all of the above tests,

then the noise source is probably cavitation. Many novices or persons

with limited experience make hasty sonar installations which function

perfectly in shallow water, or when the boat is at rest. In nearly all

cases, the cause of the malfunction will be the location and/or angle of

the transducer. The face of the transducer must be placed in a location

that has a smooth flow of water at all boat speeds. Read your trans-

ducer owner's manual or the Installation instructions (Sec. 2) in this

manual for the best mounting position.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Notes

100

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Section 6: Basic GPS Operations

This section addresses the unit's most basic GPS operations. The tuto-

rials presented in Sec. 6 follow a chronological order. Sec. 7, Advanced

GPS Operations, will discuss other more advanced functions and utili-

ties.

Before you turn on the unit and find where you are, it's a good idea to

learn about the different keys, the four Page screens and how they all

work together. BUT, if you just can't wait to get outside, turn to the

one-page Quick Reference on page 117.

Keyboard

MMC slot access door

LMS-527cDF sonar/GPS unit, front view, showing map with sonar split

screen, keyboard and access door for the MMC slot.

1. PWR/LIGHT (Power & Light) – The PWR key turns the unit on and

off and activates the backlight.

2. PAGES – Pressing this and the ← → arrow keys (4) switches the

unit between the four different page screens. (Satellite Status Page,

101

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Navigation Page, Map Page and Sonar Page.) Each page represents one

of the unit's major operation modes.

3. MENU – Press this key to show the menus and submenus, which

allow you to select a command or adjust a feature. This also accesses

search functions for streets, intersections, addresses and highway exits.

4. ARROW KEYS – These keys are used to navigate through the

menus, make menu selections, move the map cursor and sonar chart

cursor and enter data.

5. ENT/ICONS (Enter & Icons) – This key allows you to save data, ac-

cept values or execute menu commands. It is also used to create event

marker icons.

6. EXIT – The Exit key lets you return to the previous screen, clear

data or close a menu.

7. WPT – (Waypoint) The Waypoint key is used to save and recall way-

points, search for waypoints and access the waypoint list. It also

launches the Point-of-Interest (POI) search menus and is involved in

some navigation functions.

8. ZOUT – (Zoom Out) – This key lets you zoom the screen out. On the

Sonar Page, this key returns you to a full sonar chart display, showing

the entire water column from surface to bottom. On the Map Page, this

lets you see a larger geographic area on the map. Less detail is seen as

you zoom out.

9. ZIN – (Zoom In) – This key lets you zoom the screen in. On the Sonar

Page, this key enlarges fish signals and bottom detail. On the Map

Page, zooming in lets you see greater detail in a smaller geographic

area on the map.

Power/lights on and off

To turn on the unit, press PWR. As the unit powers up, the Map Page is

displayed first. (To switch to another page, press PAGES|← or → to

Page Name|EXIT.)

To turn on the backlight, press PWR again. The unit has three back-

light levels to select from. Repeatedly pressing PWR will cycle through

the backlight settings and turn off the backlight.

Turn off the unit by pressing and holding the PWR key for 3 seconds.

Main Menu

The unit has a Main Menu, which contains some function commands and

some setup option commands. The tutorial lessons in this section will

deal only with functions, the basic commands that make the unit do

102

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

something. The GPS will work fine for these lessons right out of the box

with the factory default settings. But, if you want to learn about the vari-

ous options, see Sec. 8, System Setup and GPS Setup Options.

You can access the Main Menu from any of the four Page screens by

pressing MENU|MENU. To clear the menu screen and return to the page

display, press EXIT.

Main Menu.

The Main Menu commands and their functions are:

Screen: changes the contrast or brightness of the display screen.

Sounds: enables or disables the sounds for key strokes and alarms and

sets the alarm style.

Transparency: adjusts the level of transparency for menus.

Alarms: turns GPS or sonar alarms on or off and changes alarm

thresholds.

Route Planning: used to plan, view or navigate a route.

My Trails: shows, hides, creates and deletes plot trails. Also used to

navigate or backtrack a trail.

Cancel Navigation: turns off the various navigation commands. Used

to stop navigating after you have reached your destination waypoint,

Point of Interest or map cursor location; or after you reach the end of a

route or trail.

Sonar Setup: sets various sonar options.

GPS Setup: sets various GPS receiver options.

System Setup: sets general configuration options.

NMEA 2000: provides access to all NMEA 2000 network setup options,

including the configuration of devices on the network. For more infor-

mation, see Section 10: NMEA 2000 Menu.

103

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Sun/Moon Calculations: finds the rising and setting time of the sun

and the moon.

Trip Calculator: shows trip status and statistics.

Timers: controls the up timer, down timer and alarm clock settings.

Browse MMC Files: this allows you to view the installed MMC card

and the files it contains.

Pages

The unit has four Page displays that represent the five major operating

modes. They are the Satellite Status Page, the Navigation Page, Map

Page and the Sonar Page. They are accessed by pressing the PAGES key,

then using → or ← to select a Page. (Clear the Pages menu by pressing

EXIT.)

Pages Menu showing Map page options.

Sonar Page

The Sonar Page displays the sonar chart, a view of the water column

from the surface to the bottom. The chart scrolls across the screen from

right to left, displaying signal echoes that represent fish, structure and

the bottom. The Sonar Page is discussed in detail in Sec. 3.

Satellite Status Page

The Satellite Status Page provides detailed information on the status

of the unit's satellite lock-on and position acquisition. To get to the Sat-

ellite Status Page: Press the PAGES key, then use → or ← to select

STATUS. (Clear the Pages Menu by pressing EXIT.)

No matter what Page you are on, a flashing current position indica-

tor/question mark symbol and flashing GPS data displays indicate that

satellite lock has been lost and there is no position confirmed. The Sat-

ellite Status Page shows you the quality and accuracy of the current

satellite lock-on and position calculation.

104

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

WARNING:

Do not begin navigating with this unit until the numbers

have stopped flashing!

Satellite Status Page (left). Custom Gauges (right).

This screen will show a graphical view of the satellites that are in view.

Each satellite is shown on the circular chart relative to your position. The

point in the center of the chart is directly overhead. The small inner ring

represents 45° above the horizon and the large ring represents the horizon.

North is at the top of the screen. You can use this to see which satellites are

obstructed by obstacles in your immediate area if the unit is facing north.

The GPS receiver will track satellites that are in bold type. The re-

ceiver hasn't locked onto a satellite if the number is grayed out, there-

fore it isn't being used to calculate your position.

Beneath the circular graph will be bar graphs, one for each satellite in

view. Since the unit has twelve channels, it can dedicate one channel

per visible satellite. The taller the bar on the graph, the better the unit

is receiving the signals from the satellite.

You can set up custom digital gauges through the Satellite Status page

menu. The Custom Gauges feature allows you to monitor a wide vari-

ety of data from one page.

To set up Custom Gauge page:

1. Select the SATELLITE STATUS page from the Pages menu, highlight CUS-

TOM GAUGES and press ENT.

2. Press MENU. OVERLAY DATA will highlighted, so press ENT. The Overlay

Data shown menu will appear.

3. Highlight (PRESS ENT TO ADD…) and press ENT to open the Data Viewer

menu with five expandable data categories: GPS Data, Navigation,

Trip Calculator, Time and Sensor Data.

105

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4. Highlight the desired data category and press ENT, which will ex-

pand the list, revealing several subcategories with checkboxes next to

them.

5. Select the desired subcategory and press ENT, which will place a

checkmark in the checkbox, showing the selected data is set for display.

6. If you want to display other data types, repeat Steps 4 and 5. Press

EXIT repeatedly to get back to the Custom Gauges page. The data you

selected will now be displayed on the screen.

To change Overlay data size:

1. From the Custom Gauges page, press MENU SELECT OVERLAY DATA and

press ENT. The Overlay Data Shown menu will appear.

2. Highlight the Data Type you want to resize, then use ← → to set the

data to the desired size to one of four options: Off, Small, Medium,

Large and Enormous.

3. To change the size of another Data Type, repeat the steps above. To

return to the Sonar with Custom Gauges display, press EXIT.

NOTE:

One of the data display options for the Satellite Status page is "Po-

sition Error" (horizontal position error), which can appear in one of

the page's data boxes. If you turn on Position Error, it will show

you the expected error from a benchmark location. In other words,

if the Position Error box shows 50 feet, then the position shown by

the unit is estimated to be within 50 feet of the actual location.

This also gives you an indicator of the fix quality the unit currently

has. The smaller the position error number, the better (and more ac-

curate) the fix is. If the position error flashes dashes, then the unit

hasn't locked onto the satellites, and the number shown isn't valid.

(For details, see the Customize Page Displays entry in Sec. 8.)

The Satellite Status Page has its own menu, which is used for setting

various options. (Options and setup are discussed in Sec. 8). To access

the Satellite Status Page Menu, from the Status Page, press MENU.

Navigation Page

This screen has a compass rose that not only shows your direction of

travel, but also the direction to a recalled waypoint. The page has two

options, navigation with digital data and navigation with sonar. To get

to the Navigation Page: Press PAGES|→ or ← to NAVIGATION. Press ↓ or

↑|EXIT to select one of the two menu items.

The navigation screen looks like the one below when you're not navi-

gating to a waypoint or following a route or trail. Your position is

shown by an arrow in the center of the screen. Your trail history, or

106

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

path you've just taken, is depicted by the line extending from the ar-

row. The arrow pointing down at the top of the compass rose indicates

the current track (direction of travel) you are taking.

Track or compass heading indicator, showing direction of travel

Navigation

Compass

information

rose

displays in

customizable

data boxes

Present

position

arrow

Trail line

The Navigation with Digital Data Page recording a trail, while travel-

ing southwest. Page looks like this when the unit is not navigating to a

waypoint, following a route, or backtracking a trail.

Navigation with Sonar page.

When navigating to a waypoint, your ground speed, track, distance,

bearing to the waypoint and course are all displayed.

NOTE:

Remember, when the Speed, Track and Position information dis-

plays are flashing, satellite lock has not been achieved and no posi-

tion fix has been determined. A question mark will also flash on the

present position arrow in the center of the compass rose.

107

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Speed (ground speed) is the velocity you are making over the ground.

(If you wish, you can customize the Speed data box to display Closing

Speed instead. Closing Speed is also known as velocity made good. It's

the speed that you're making toward the waypoint. For instructions,

see the Customize Page Displays entry in Sec. 8.)

Track is the heading, or the current direction you are actually travel-

ing. Bearing is the direction of a line-of-sight from your present posi-

tion to the destination. No matter what direction you are steering, the

Bearing window shows the compass direction straight to the destina-

tion from your location at the moment. Distance shows how far it is to

the waypoint you're navigating toward.

The Off Course window shows the current cross track error. This shows

the distance you are off-course to the side of the desired course line. The

course line is an imaginary line drawn from your position when you

started navigating to the destination waypoint. The course line is shown

on the Navigation Page screen (and the Map Page screen) as a dotted line.

Course line

Left cross track error line

Heading arrow

Current track or

heading, shown

in degrees

Bearing

arrow

Waypoint

symbol

Compass bearing

to destination

Cross track

error range

(off course

indicator)

Trail line

Navigation

information

displays

in data

Destination

name

boxes

Navigation Page.

The cross track error range is shown on the compass rose as a wide,

white, corridor enclosing the course line. The outer edges of this white

corridor represent lines that show the current cross track error range.

The default for the cross track error range is 0.20 miles.

For example, if the present position symbol touches the right cross

track error line, then you are 0.20 miles to the right of the desired

course. You need to steer left to return to the desired course.

108

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

You can use the ZIN or ZOUT keys to change the cross track error range.

A circular symbol showing your destination (waypoint) appears on the

screen as you approach the waypoint, as shown on the screen in the

preceding figure.

Travel Time is the time that it will take to reach your destination at

your present closing speed. (You can also customize the time data box

to show Arrival Time instead. Arrival Time is the local time it will be

when you arrive at the destination, based upon your present closing

speed and track.)

In the preceding example, the driver is headed west (a 265º track) to-

ward a waypoint 265º (bearing) away. The cross track error range

(white corridor) is 0.20 miles either side of the course. The driver is

headed toward trail waypoint 4, which is 0.3 miles away. The vehicle is

right on course. Traveling at a speed of 8 mph, the driver will arrive at

the waypoint in 2 minutes, 17 seconds.

The Navigation Page has its own menu, which is used for some ad-

vanced functions and for setting various options. (Options and setup

are discussed in Sec. 8). To access the Navigation Page Menu, from the

Navigation Page, press MENU.

Map Page

The Map Page screens show your course and track from a bird's-eye

view. By default, this unit shows the map with north always at the top

of the screen. (This can be changed. See the topic Map Orientation, in

Sec. 8.) If you're navigating to a waypoint, the map also shows your

starting location, present position, course line and destination. You,

however, don't have to navigate to a waypoint to use the map.

Map Page is the default screen that appears when you turn on the unit.

To get to the Map Page from another page: Press PAGES|← or → to

MAP|EXIT. When the Map Page is displayed, a screen similar to the fol-

lowing figures appears.

The arrow in the center of the screen is your present position. It points

in the direction you're traveling. The solid line extending from the back

of the arrow is your plot trail, or path you've taken.

The map zoom range is the distance across the screen. This number

shows in the lower right corner of the screen. In the first of the follow-

ing example figures, the range is 4,000 miles from the left edge of the

map to the right edge of the map.

The Zoom In and Zoom Out keys zoom the map to enlarge or reduce its

coverage area and the amount of mapping detail shown. There are 39

available map zoom ranges, from 0.02 miles to 4,000 miles.

109

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Map Page opening screen (left). Set to 100-mile zoom (center) and 10-

mile zoom (right). Over Zoomed means you have reached the detail

limits in an area covered only by the basic background map. Zooming

in closer will reveal no more map detail because a high-detail custom

map has not been loaded on the MMC for this area.

If you're using only the factory-loaded background map, the maximum

zoom range for showing additional map detail is 20 miles. You can con-

tinue to zoom in closer, but the map will simply be enlarged without

revealing more map content (except for a few major city streets.) Load

your own high-detail custom map made with MapCreate (or a pre-made

FreedomMap from LEI), and you can zoom in to 0.02 miles with mas-

sive amounts of accurate map detail.

Map Pages with high-detail MapCreate map of an urban area loaded on

the MMC. Arterial streets appear at the 4-mile zoom range (left) with a

few Point of Interest icons visible. Numerous dots representing Points of

Interest are visible at the 2-mile range (center) along with minor streets.

At a 0.4-mile zoom (right), you can see an interstate highway with an

exit, major and minor streets as well as Point of Interest icons.

Background map vs. MapCreate map content

The background map includes: low-detail maps of the whole world (con-

taining cities, major lakes, major rivers, political boundaries); and me-

dium-detail maps of the United States.

The medium-detail U.S. maps contain: all incorporated cities; shaded

metropolitan areas; county boundaries; shaded public lands (such as

110

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

national forests and parks); some major city streets; Interstate, U.S.

and state highways; Interstate highway exits and exit services infor-

mation; large- and medium-sized lakes and streams; and more than

60,000 navigation aids and 10,000 wrecks and obstructions in U.S.

coastal and Great Lakes waters.

MapCreate custom maps include massive amounts of information not

found in the background map. MapCreate maps contain the searchable

Points of Interest database, all the minor roads and streets, all the

landmark features (such as summits, schools, radio towers, etc.); more

rivers, streams, smaller lakes and ponds and their names.

What's more important is the large scale map detail that allows your

GPS unit to show a higher level of position accuracy. For example, the

background map would show you the general outline and approximate

shape of a coastline or water body, but the higher detail in MapCreate

shows the shoreline completely and accurately (finer detail). Many

smaller islands would not be included in the background map, but are

in MapCreate.

NOTE:

Available through LEI Extras (look inside back cover for accessory

ordering information), FreedomMaps are pre-made maps that con-

tain all of the same information available in a custom MapCreate

map, without any work on your part.

Interstate

Major Street

Cursor line

Minor

Streets

POI

Pop-up

POI

Marker

Restaurant

School POI

POI

Position,

distance and

bearing data

Zoom Range

When the map is zoomed out far enough, most POIs appear as square

dots. As you zoom in closer, the symbols become readable icons. In the

0.2 mile zoom example (right), the cursor has selected the Cupps Café

POI, which triggers a pop-up box with the POI name. This pop-up box

works on POIs at any zoom range.

111

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Tip:

In some urban areas, businesses are so close to one another that

their POI icons crowd each other on the screen. You can reduce

screen clutter and make streets and other map features easier to

see by simply turning off the display of POIs you're not watching

for. (To see how, check the text on Map Detail Category Selection,

page 162. It shows how to use the Map Categories Drawn menu to

turn individual POI displays off and on.) Even though their display

is turned off, you can still search for POIs and their icons will pop-

up when your unit finds them for you.

The Map Page has its own menu, which is used for several functions

and for setting various options. To access the Map Page Menu, from the

Map Page, press MENU.

The Pages Menu also offers several map display options under the Map

Page category. To access them, press PAGES|← → to MAP|↓ to Op-

tion|EXIT.

Digital Data map page (left). Two Position Formats page (right).

In pages that have two major windows (such as two maps) you can tog-

gle back and forth between the two windows by pressing

PAGES|PAGES. This allows you to change which map your cursor

moves on, and which map the menu operates on. The window with the

blue title bar is the active window.

112

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Pages Menu with Two Map option selected (left). The windows are in a

horizontal position. Map Page with two vertical windows (right).

Resize Window is another feature for pages that have two major win-

dows. You can change the horizontal size of the windows to suit your

viewing preference.

1. From any two-window display, press MENU|↓ to RESIZE WINDOW|ENT.

2. Four flashing arrows appear along the centerline dividing the two

windows. The windows will be in a horizontal position by default, so

press ↑ ↓ to resize the windows. Or, if you want to realign the windows

vertically, use ← → to switch the windows from a horizontal position

to a vertical position. After the windows are in a vertical position, press

← → to resize the windows. Press EXIT to clear the menu.

3. To change the window size again or revert to the original display,

just follow the steps above. You can also use the Reset Options com-

mand to revert to the factory default.

Map with Sonar

The Map with Sonar page evenly splits the screen between the map

view and sonar view. The windows may be resized to fit your prefer-

ence.

To resize Map with Sonar windows:

1. Press PAGES, highlight MAP, select MAP WITH SONAR and press ENT.

2. Press MENU, highlight RESIZE WINDOWS and press ENT. Two horizontal

arrows will appear on the screen.

3. Use ← → to increase or decrease the size of the windows. Press EXIT

to return to normal operation.

113

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Map with Sonar highlighted on Pages menu (left). Resize Windows se-

lected on Map with Sonar menu (center). Dual arrows are shown as

windows are resized (right).

Map with Custom Gauges

The Map with Custom Gauges page has a split screen with a map on

the right side and digital gauge information on the left side. The two

windows can be resized to make one side bigger than the other or may

be set up to split the screen evenly.

Map with Custom Gauges highlighted on Pages menu (left). Overlay

Data selected on Map with Custom Gauges menu (right).

To customize digital gauge display:

1. Press PAGES, highlight Map, select MAP WITH CUSTOM GAUGES and press

ENT.

2. Press MENU, select OVERLAY DATA and press ENT. The Overlay Data

shown menu will appear.

3. Highlight (PRESS ENT TO ADD…) and press ENT to open the Data Viewer

menu with five expandable data categories: GPS Data, Navigation,

Trip Calculator, Time, Sonar Data and Sensor Data.

114

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4. Highlight the desired data category and press ENT, which will ex-

pand the list, revealing several subcategories with checkboxes next to

them.

5. Select the desired subcategory and press ENT, which will place a

checkmark in the checkbox, showing the selected data is set for display.

6. If you want to display other data types, repeat Steps 4 and 5. Press

EXIT repeatedly to get back to the Map with Custom Gauges page. The

data you selected will now be displayed in the gray area on the left side

of the screen.

To change Overlay data size:

1. From the Map with Custom Gauges page, press MENU select OVERLAY

DATA and press ENT. The Overlay Data Shown menu will appear.

2. Highlight the Data Type you want to resize, then use ← → to switch

the data setting to one of the following four options: Off, Small, Me-

dium, Large and Enormous.

3. To change the size of another Data Type, repeat the steps above. To

return to the Sonar with Custom Gauges display, press EXIT.

Ground Speed is set to small size (left). The size Ground Speed data

has been changed to Large (right).

Radar

When you access the Radar Page, the screen will switch to the radar dis-

play. Information on radar installation and radar operation are included

in two documents that come packed with Lowrance radar units: Radar

and RIM 100 Radar Interface Module Installation Instructions and Radar

Operation Instruction Manual. Refer to these documents for information

on your radar unit.

115

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Radar Page (left) with Radar menu display (right).

To access Radar Page:

1. Press PAGES, highlight the RADAR tab and press ENT.

2. Press MENU to open the Radar menu. Press EXIT to return to the ra-

dar display.

The following page contains a 12-step quick reference for the most basic

GPS operations.

116

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic GPS Quick Reference

Start outdoors, with a clear view of the open sky. As you practice, try navi-

gating to a location at least a few blocks away. Navigation in too small an

area will constantly trigger arrival alarms.

1. Depress the PWR key to turn on the unit.

2. Opening screen displays map of North America at the 4,000 mile

zoom range. Rotate through the four main Page screens (Map Page,

Satellite Status Page, Navigation Page and Sonar Page) by pressing

PAGES|← or → to select Page Name|EXIT. Switch Pages to display Sat-

ellite Status Page.

3. Wait while unit locates satellites and calculates current position. Process

is visible on Satellite Page. This takes an average of 1 minute or less under

when it is unobstructed by terrain or structures. When the unit acquires

position, a tone sounds and a position acquired message appears.

4. With position acquired, press PAGES key to display the Map Page,

which gives you a bird's eye view. You can manipulate the map by:

Zoom in closer to see greater detail: press ZIN (zoom in key.)

Zoom out to see more area, less detail: press ZOUT (zoom out key.)

Scroll map north, south, east or west using arrow keys ↑ ↓ → ← .

To stop scrolling and return to current position on map, press EXIT key.

5. Set a waypoint (Wpt 001) at your current position so you can navigate

back here: press WPT|WPT. Waypoint symbol and "001" appears.

6. Zoom/scroll map to find a nearby object or location to go to. Use ar-

row keys to center cursor crosshairss over the map object or location.

7. Navigate to the selected destination: press MENU|ENT|EXIT. Follow dot-

ted course line on Map Page or compass bearing arrow on Navigation Page.

8. At destination, Arrival Alarm goes off; to clear it, press EXIT. Cancel

9. Return to Wpt 1 by Navigate To Waypoint or Backtrack Trail. To

Waypoint: press WPT|→ to SAVED|ENT|ENT|ENT. Use ↑ or ↓ to select

Wpt 001, press ENT|ENT; follow navigation displays. Trail: press

arrival alarm sounds, press EXIT.) Follow navigation displays.

10. Back home, Arrival Alarm goes off; press EXIT. Cancel navigation:

11. To turn off the unit, press and hold PWR key for three seconds.

117

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Find Your Current Position

Finding your current position is as simple as turning on the unit. With-

out obstruction from dense foliage, terrain or structures, the unit auto-

matically searches for satellites and calculates its position in approxi-

mately one minute or less.

If for some reason satellite acquisition takes longer, you may be inside

a structure or vehicle or in terrain that is blocking signal reception. To

correct this, be sure you are positioned so that the unit's antenna mod-

ule has as clear a view of the sky as possible, then turn the unit off and

back on again.

Moving Around the Map: Zoom & Cursor Arrow Keys

The map is presented from a bird's eye view. The current zoom range

shows in the lower left corner of the screen.

1. Press the ZIN key (zoom in) to move in closer and see greater detail in a

smaller geographic area.

2. Press the ZOUT key (zoom out) to move farther away and see less map

detail, but a larger geographic area.

When you are traveling, the map will automatically move as you move.

This keeps your current location roughly centered on the screen.

You can manually pan or scroll the map northward, southward, east-

ward or westward by using the arrow keys, which launch the crosshairs

map cursor. This allows you to look at map places other than your cur-

rent position. To clear the cursor, press EXIT, which move the map back

to the current position or the last known position.

Tip:

Use the cursor to determine the distance from your current position

(or last known position, when working indoors) to any map object or

location. Simply use the arrow keys to position the cursor over the

object or place. The distance, measured in a straight line, appears

in the popup data box. Press EXIT to clear the cursor.

118

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Cursor line

Selected

airport

POI pop-up

data box

Distance

measured

by cursor

The selected airport to the northwest is 4.2 miles away.

Selecting Any Map Item with the Cursor

1. Use the zoom keys and the arrow keys to move around the map and

find the item you wish to select.

2. Use the arrow keys and center the cursor crosshairs on the desired ob-

ject. On most items, a pop-up box will give the name of the selected item.

Tip:

This unit has a Cursor Undo feature that lets you instantly return

to the previous location you were looking at without scrolling. It

works like this: Use the cursor (arrow keys) to scroll the map to

some far away location or waypoint. Press EXIT to clear the cursor

and jump back to your current position on the map. When you want

to take another peek at that distant place, just press EXIT again.

You can use this trick to toggle between your current position and

your destination without a lot of scrolling.

Searching

Now that you have seen how the unit can find where you are, let's

search for something else. Searching is one of the most powerful fea-

tures in the Lowrance GPS product line. In this example, we will look

for the nearest fast-food restaurant. For more information on different

types of searches, refer to Sec. 9, Searching.

NOTE:

This example requires the Point of Interest (POI) database in-

cluded with a high detail MapCreate 6 custom map.

119

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

After the unit has acquired a position:

1. Press WPT|↓ to POI-RESTAURANTS.

2. You could search the entire restaurant category, but in this example

we will narrow our search. Press → to SUBCATEGORY column|↓ to FAST

FOOD CHAINS|ENT|↓ to NEAREST|ENT.

3. The unit says it is calculating, then a list of restaurants appears,

with the closest highlighted at the top of the list. The restaurant far-

thest from you is at the bottom of the list.

Find Waypoint Menu (left). Category Selection menu (center). List of

the nearest restaurants (right).

4. You could scroll through the list to select another restaurant, but for

now we will just accept the nearest one. Press ENT.

The POI Information screen shows name, street address, phone num-

ber, latitude/longitude, distance to restaurant and its compass bear-

ing. In the first figure (left) Go to Waypoint is selected. In the second

figure (right) Find on Map is highlighted.

5. The POI information screen appears. If you wanted to navigate

there, you could press Enter, since the Go To Waypoint command is

highlighted. We just want to see it on the map, so press ↓ to FIND ON

MAP|ENT.

120

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6. The unit's map appears, with the cursor crosshairss highlighting the

restaurant's POI symbol. A pop-up data box shows the POI's name, dis-

tance and bearing. A data box at the bottom of the screen continues to

display the location's latitude and longitude.

Map screen showing Finding Waypoint,

the result of a restaurant search.

7. To clear the search and return to the last page displayed, press EXIT

repeatedly. (Before you completely exited out of the Search menus, you

could have gone looking for another place.)

NOTE:

Search works from mapping and POI data loaded in the unit. If you

do not have a high-detailed custom map (containing POI data) for

the area you are searching loaded on the MMC, you may not find

anything.

Set a Waypoint

A waypoint is simply an electronic address, based on the latitude and

longitude of a position on the earth. A waypoint represents a location or

destination that can be stored in memory, then recalled later for navi-

gational use.

You can create a waypoint at the cursor position on the map or at your

current position while you are navigating. A waypoint may be created

at any location by manually entering the position's latitude and longi-

tude. You can copy waypoints from your unit to your personal computer

with MapCreate software. When you want to repeat a trip, these ar-

chived waypoints can be reloaded into your GPS unit.

To create and save a Waypoint:

These first two techniques use the Quick Save method, the fastest and

easiest way to create a waypoint.

121

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Create Waypoint at Current Position

While you are traveling, press WPT|WPT. The waypoint is saved and

automatically given a name with a sequential number, such as "way-

point 003." The waypoint symbol and number appear on the map.

Step 1.

Step 2.

Step 4.

Step 3.

Sequence for setting a waypoint. Step 1: while traveling, press WPT

twice to call up the Find Waypoint screen (seen in Step 2) and set a

waypoint. Step 3: a message says the waypoint has been saved. Step 4:

vehicle continues on its way; waypoint number and symbol are visible

on map.

NOTE:

The Quick Save method uses the default waypoint symbol until you

edit an existing waypoint and change its symbol. After a waypoint

symbol is changed, the unit will remember the one you chose and

use it the next time you save a waypoint. To go back to the default

symbol, edit a waypoint and choose the original symbol, or use the

Reset Options command.

122

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Create Waypoint on Map

1. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor crosshairs to the place where

you want to make a waypoint.

2. Press WPT|WPT. The waypoint is saved and automatically given a

name with a sequential number, like "waypoint 001." The waypoint

symbol and number appear on the map.

Navigate To a Waypoint

You can select any waypoint visible on the Map Page with the cursor,

then use the Navigate to Cursor command (we'll describe how later in

this section.) However, you can avoid scrolling the map to pick your

waypoint if you use the Find Waypoint commands:

1. Press WPT|→ to SAVED|ENT. To look up the nearest waypoint, press

↓ to NEAREST|ENT; or, to look by name (and scroll through the entire

waypoint list), press ENT. For this example, let's look by name.

2. If your waypoint list is a long one, you can spell out the waypoint name

in the FIND BY NAME box to search for it. (Press ↑ or ↓ to change the first

character, then press → to move the cursor to the next character and re-

peat until the name is correct, then press ENT to jump to the list below.)

3. If the list is short, you can jump directly to the FIND IN LIST box by press-

ing ENT. Use ↑ or ↓ to select the waypoint name, press ENT and the way-

point information screen appears with the GO TO command selected.

4. To begin navigating to the waypoint, press ENT.

Waypoint

Course line

(dotted)

Trail line

Off course

range, set at

0.20 mile

(solid)

Destination

name

Navigation Page, navigating toward waypoint 004 and leaving a trail.

Set Man Overboard (MOB) Waypoint

One of boating's most terrifying events is having a friend or family

member fall overboard. This situation can be deadly on any body of wa-

ter. It's particularly dangerous at night or if you're out of sight of land.

123

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Of course, the first thing to do is remain calm and then use all standard

safety procedures to rescue the person.

This unit has a man overboard feature that shows navigation data to

the location where the feature was activated. To activate it, press the

ZOUT and ZIN keys at the same time. Your position at the time these

keys are pressed is used as the man overboard position.

Caution:

Saving a new "Man Overboard" waypoint will overwrite the pre-

vious "Man Overboard" waypoint.

Navigate Back to MOB Waypoint

Find your way back to the accident position with the Navigation Page

or Map Page. When MOB is activated, the Navigation Page automati-

cally shows the compass rose with its bearing arrow pointing toward

the man overboard position, and the destination name says "Going To

Man Overboard." The Map Page displays a Man Overboard waypoint,

represented by a human figure, and the steering arrow points where to

steer to reach that position.

Navigating to Man Overboard: Man Overboard Activated message (left).

Navigation Page, center, Map Page (right). The victim is to the starboard

of the vessel. The GPS shows which direction to go for the rescue.

The man overboard position is also stored in the waypoint list for fu-

ture reference. It can be edited the same as any other waypoint. This

prevents the inadvertent loss of the current Man Overboard position.

To cancel navigation to MOB, press MENU|MENU|↓ to CANCEL NAVIGA-

^TION|ENT|← to YES|ENT. The unit stops showing navigation information.

Navigate to Cursor Position on Map

The GO TO CURSOR command: navigates to the current cursor position on

the map. It's a quick and handy way to navigate to anything you can

see on the map display.

124

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1. Use the cursor (controlled by the arrow keys) with the zoom in and

zoom out keys to maneuver around the map until you find a location

you want to go to.

2. Center the cursor over the location to select it. See the example in

the following figure. (Many map items such as waypoints, Points of In-

terest, towns, etc. can be "selected," and appear "highlighted" with a

pop-up box. Other features, such as a river or a street intersection will

not appear "highlighted," but the cursor will take you to those locations

just the same.)

Navigate to cursor. In this example, the cursor is centered on Oologah,

Oklahoma.

3. Press MENU|ENT and the unit will begin navigating to the cursor

location.

The Map Page will display a dotted line from your current position to the

cursor position. The Navigation Page displays a compass rose showing

navigation information to your destination. See the following examples.

The 15-mile zoom figure (left) clearly shows the dotted course line con-

necting your current position to your destination. The 40-mile zoom

(center) shows both current position and destination on screen. The

Navigation Page (right) will also show navigation information.

125

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To stop navigating to the cursor, use the Cancel Navigation command:

stops showing navigation information.

Navigate to a Point of Interest

For POIs that are in view on the map, you can easily use the Navigate

to Cursor command above; just use the cursor to select the POI.

The other method involves searching for POIs with the Find Waypoint

command, launched with the WPT key. (See the searching example ear-

lier in this section, or turn to Sec. 9, Searching, for detailed instructions

on POI searches.)

To Navigate to a POI:

1. Press WPT, select the desired POI category, then press → to Subcate-

gory.

2. Highlight the desired subcategory and press ENT. The Find By menu

will appear with two search options: Name of Nearest.

3. Select the desired search option and press ENT. A list of POIs will

appear. If you chose Nearest as the search option, use ↑ ↓ to select the

desired POI and press ENT. If you chose to search by Name, use ↑ ↓, ←

→ to input the POI name. When the name has been entered press ENT

to access the POI list.

4. Select the desired POI and press ENT, which will open the Waypoint

Information menu.

5. Highlight GO TO WAYPOINT and press ENT. The unit begins showing

navigation information to the item.

To cancel navigation, press MENU|MENU|↓ to CANCEL NAVIGATION|ENT|←

to YES|ENT. The unit stops showing navigation information.

Creating and Saving a Trail

A trail, or plot trail, is a string of position points plotted by the unit as

you travel. It's a travel history, a record of the path you have taken.

Trails are useful for repeating a journey along the same track. They are

particularly handy when you are trying to retrace your trip and go back

the way you came. On the screen, trails are represented by a solid line

extending from the back of the current position arrow.

The unit is set at the factory to automatically create and record a trail

while the unit is turned on. The unit will continue recording the trail

until the length reaches the maximum trail point setting (default is

2,000, but the unit can record trails 9,999 points long). When the point

limit is reached, the unit begins recording the trail over itself.

126

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

By default, the trail flashes once a second, making it easier to see against

the background map. With the default auto setting, this unit creates a

trail by placing a dot (trail point) on the screen every time you change di-

rections. (The methods used for creating a trail and the trail update rate

can both be adjusted or even turned off. See Sec. 8 for Trail Options.)

To preserve a trail from point A to point B, you must "turn off" the trail

by making it inactive before heading to point C or even back to point A.

When the current trail is set inactive, the unit automatically begins

recording a new trail.

Active

symbol

Visible

symbol

Sequence for saving a trail and beginning a new one. Left, My Trails

command. Center, the Trails Menu. The arrow to the right of Trail 1

indicates the trail is "active," and the check to the left indicates the

trail is visible on the map display. The right figure shows the Edit

Trail menu, with the Active command selected.

To Save a Trail

1. Press MENU|MENU|↓ to MY TRAILS|ENT.

2. Press ↓ to the Active Trail Name|ENT.

3. Press ↓ to ACTIVE|ENT. This unchecks the Active option.

4. To return to the previous page, press EXIT repeatedly. As you leave

the Edit Trail menu, you will notice that a new trail starts with a new

sequential number. In the example figure below, the new trail is num-

ber 2, showing zero points. Note that Trail 1 is inactive, but it is still

visible on the map.

127

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

New trail, named "Trail 2," is created when Trail 1 is made inactive.

Any new travel will be recorded in this trail, which is active and visi-

ble. Trails do not need to be visible in order to be active.

You can save and recall up to 10 different plot trails, which can be cop-

ied to your MMC for archiving or for transfer to your MapCreate soft-

ware.

Tip:

Another quick way to stop recording one trail and begin a new one

is to use the New Trail command: Press MENU|MENU|↓ to MY

TRAILS|ENT|ENT.

Caution:

You also have the option of completely turning off trail re-

cording, under the trail Options command. However, if the Up-

date Active Trail option is turned off, it will cancel the auto-

matic trail creation feature.

Displaying a Saved Trail

The active trail is automatically displayed on the map (the "Visible"

option) with the factory default settings. You can selectively turn trail

display off and on for any saved or active trail. In the Saved Trails List,

visible trails have a check mark in front of the trail name.

To turn off trail display:

1. Press MENU|MENU|↓ to MY TRAILS|ENT.

2. Press ↓ to enter the Saved Trail list, then use ↑ ↓ to select the de-

sired Trail Name|ENT.

3. Press ↓ to ACTIVE|→ to VISIBLE|ENT. To return to the previous page,

press EXIT repeatedly.

128

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To turn on trail display:

1. Press MENU|MENU|↓ to MY TRAILS|ENT.

2. Press ↓ to enter the Saved Trail list, then use ↑ ↓ to select the de-

sired Trail Name|ENT.

3. Press ↓ to ACTIVE|→ to VISIBLE|ENT. To return to the previous page,

press EXIT repeatedly.

Navigating Trails

There are three methods for following a trail: visual trailing, navigat-

ing a trail (forward) and backtracking a trail (backward). Try each

method to see which you prefer.

Visual trailing is the simplest method. It uses only the Map Page and

requires no menu commands at all. The technique works the same if

you are running a trail forward (from start to end) or backward (from

end to start.) However, visual trailing provides no navigation informa-

tion during the trip, such as the time to your destination.

The other two methods provide a full range of navigation data and

work with both the Map Page and Navigation Page. The only difference

between them is "navigating a trail" follows a trail forward (from start

to end) while "backtracking" follows a trail in reverse (from end to

start.)

When hiking at walking speed with a hand-held GPS, we often just use

visual back trailing because it is a bit better at following each little

turn on a foot path. At faster speeds, such as the highway or on the wa-

ter, the Navigate Trail and Backtrack Trail commands are handy.

Visual Trailing

1. On the Map Page, zoom (ZIN or ZOUT) so your flashing trail is visible.

2. Begin moving and watch the Map Page. Simply walk or steer so that

your current position arrow traces along the trail you have just made.

Tip:

Generally, when using this method, the smaller the zoom range,

the more accurately you will be able to steer along the trail.

Navigate a Trail

The following figures illustrate the menu sequence for navigating a

trail.

1. Press MENU|MENU|↓ to MY TRAILS|ENT.

2. Press ↓|↓ to enter the Saved Trail list, then use ↑ or ↓ to select the

desired Trail Name|ENT.

129

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3. Press → to DELETE TRAIL|↓ to NAVIGATE|ENT.

4. Press ↓ to NAVIGATE|ENT. The unit begins showing navigation infor-

mation along the trail.

NOTE:

If you are already located at or near the beginning of your trail, the

arrival alarm will go off as soon as you hit Enter. Press EXIT to

clear the alarm and proceed.

5. Now, begin navigating with your unit.

6. When you reach your destination, be sure to cancel your navigation:

press MENU|MENU|↓ to CANCEL NAVIGATION|ENT. The unit asks if you're

sure; press ←|ENT.

Figure 1.

Figure 2.

Figure 3.

Figure 4.

Navigate a trail menu sequence: Fig. 1, My Trails command. Fig. 2,

Trails Menu. Fig. 3, Edit Trail Menu. Fig. 4, Edit Route Menu with

Navigate command highlighted for Trail 6. A trail is always converted

to a "route" when you navigate the trail.

On the Map Page, the trail you are navigating is represented by a dot-

ted line that alternates with a flashing solid line. The Navigation Page

will also show the navigated trail as a dotted line. The bearing arrow

on the compass rose points to the next waypoint on the trail.

As you travel, the arrival alarm will go off when you near a trail way-

point, and the bearing arrow on the compass rose will swing around

and point to the next trail waypoint. Press EXIT to clear the alarm.

130

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

North Ï

Present

position

arrow

Trail

Trail point

dotted line

Navigate trail, map views: Driver is northbound heading straight to-

ward trail point 6 (left). Northbound driver has reached point 6 and

has turned west to follow trail (right).

Track or compass heading indicator

Trail

Cross track

waypoint

error range

symbol

(off course

Course

indicator)

line made

from trail

Arrival

alarm

Bearing

arrow

Navigate trail, navigation page (compass rose) views: driver is

northbound heading straight toward trail point 6 (left); bearing arrow

shows the trail point is due north (straight ahead.) Driver has reached

trail point 6 and must turn west to follow the trail (right). Arrival

alarm goes off and bearing arrow swings around toward the west and

the next waypoint. The unit now shows navigation information to

point 7, which is 2.02 miles away.

Navigate a Back Trail (backtrack)

1. Press MENU|MENU|↓ to MY TRAILS|ENT.

2. Press ↓|↓ to enter the Saved Trail list, then use ↑ or ↓ to select the

desired Trail Name|ENT.

3. Press → to DELETE TRAIL|↓ to NAVIGATE|ENT.

4. Press ↓ to NAVIGATE|→ to REVERSE|ENT|← to NAVIGATE|ENT. The unit

begins showing navigation information along the trail, in reverse.

131

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

NOTE

If you are already located at or near the end of your trail, the arri-

val alarm will go off as soon as you hit ENT. Press EXIT to clear the

alarm and proceed.

5. Now, begin navigating with your unit.

6. When you reach your destination, be sure to cancel your navigation:

press MENU|MENU|↓ to CANCEL NAVIGATION|ENT. The unit asks if you're

sure; press ←|ENT.

Transfer Custom Maps and GPS Data Files

Custom Maps:

Custom maps work only from the MMC card or SD card. When a card

containing a Custom Map File is loaded into the unit, the unit auto-

matically loads the map into memory when the unit is turned on.

Instructions for copying Custom Map Files to an MMC are contained in

the instruction manual for your MMC card reader and MapCreate 6

software. For instructions on inserting an MMC into the unit, see Sec.

2, Installation/Accessories.

GPS Data files:

GPS Data Files contain waypoints, routes, trails and event marker

icons. Instructions for copying GPS Data Files between your computer

and an MMC are contained in the instruction manual for your MMC

card reader and MapCreate 6 software.

GPS data automatically recorded in the unit's internal memory must

be saved to the MMC (as a GPS Data File) in order to store it on your

personal computer. GPS Data Files stored on an MMC must be copied

from the card to the unit's internal memory before the unit can read

them. Here's how:

1. Insert the MMC into your unit. Press MENU|MENU|↓ to SYSTEM

SETUP|ENT|↓ to TRANSFER MY DATA|ENT and the screen below appears.

2. The Transfer My Data menu includes a message which tells you if an

MMC is present or not. If no MMC is present, you must first insert a

card into the unit in order to activate the Load or Save commands.

To transfer data from the unit to the MMC: press ENT (for SAVE.)

To transfer data from the MMC to the unit: press → to LOAD|ENT.

132

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Transfer My Data highlighted (left). When transferring data (right)

you will have the option of transferring the unit's data to a MMC card

or loading the data on the MMC card into the unit.

3. Saving to MMC: To accept the default name "Data" for the GPS

Data File, press ↓ to SAVE DATA|ENT. If you want to rename the file (as

shown in the following figures), press ENT to activate the selection box.

Press ↑ or ↓ to change the first character, then press → to the next

character and repeat until the name is correct. Then, press ENT|↓ to

SAVE DATA|ENT.

The unit will display first a progress message followed by a completion

message when the data transfer is finished. To return to the Page view,

repeatedly press EXIT.

These figures (left to right) show the menu sequence for naming and

saving a GPS Data File from the unit's memory to an MMC.

4. Loading to unit memory: There may be more than one GPS Data

File (*.USR) on the card. To select a file, press ENT to activate the se-

lection box, use ↓ or ↑ to highlight the file, then press ENT to accept the

selection. Next, press ↓ to LOAD DATA|ENT. The unit will display a com-

pletion message when the data transfer is finished. To return to the

Page view, press EXIT repeatedly.

133

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Figure 2.

Figure 1.

Figure 3.

Figure 4.

These figures show the menu sequence for loading a GPS Data File

from an MMC into the unit's memory.

Cancel Navigation

You can turn off any of the navigation commands after you reach your

destination or at any other time by using the Cancel Navigation com-

134

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Section 7:

Advanced GPS Operations

Find Distance from different Locations

1. While on the Map Page press: MENU|↓ to FIND DISTANCE|ENT.

2. Center your cursor over the position you want to find the distance to.

A rubber band line appears, connecting your current position to the

cursor's location. The distance along that line will appear in a pop-up

box. The box also shows the bearing to the point you're measuring to.

3. Press EXIT to return to regular operation.

Distance from Dallas to Little Rock is 292.2 miles (left). The distance

from the boat's current position to the boat ramp is 0.52 miles (right).

Find Distance from Point to Point

You can also measure distance between two other points on the map.

1. While on the Map Page press: MENU|↓ to FIND DISTANCE|ENT.

2. Center your cursor over the first position. (A rubber band line ap-

pears, connecting your current position to the cursor's location.) Press

ENT to set the first point, and the rubber band line disappears.

3. Move the cursor to the second position. The rubber band line reap-

pears, connecting the first point you set to the cursor. The distance

along that line will appear in the pop-up box.

4. Press EXIT to clear the command and return to the page screen.

(Press EXIT once more to clear the cursor.)

135

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Icons

Icons are graphic symbols used to mark some location, personal point of

interest or event. They can be placed on the map screen, saved and re-

called later for navigation purposes. These are sometimes referred to as

event marker icons. This unit has 42 different symbols you can pick

from when creating an icon.

Icons are similar to waypoints, but they do not store as much informa-

tion (like names) as waypoints do. You can't use a menu to navigate to

icons as you can with waypoints. (But, you can use the map cursor and

navigate to any icon on the map.)

You can create an icon at the cursor position on the map, or at your

current position while you are navigating.

Create Icon on Map

1. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the place where you want

to make an icon.

2. Press ENT and the Select Icon Symbol menu will appear.

3. Press ↑ ↓ , ← → to select your icon symbol and press ENT. The icon

appears on the map.

Cursor selects icon location (left). Select Icon Symbol menu (center),

Music note icon on map (right). (Cursor has been moved for clarity.)

Create Icon at Current Position

1. While you are traveling, press ENT and the Select Icon Symbol menu

will appear.

2. Press ↑ ↓, ← → to select your icon symbol, then press ENT. The icon

appears on the map.

Delete an Icon

You can delete all the icons at one time, delete all icons represented by

a particular symbol or use the cursor to delete a selected icon from the

map.

136

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1. Press MENU|↓ to DELETE MY ICONS|ENT.

2. Press ↓ to DELETE ALL ICONS, DELETE BY SYMBOL, or DELETE FROM MAP and

press ENT.

Delete icons menu.

The Delete All Icons command will ask if you are sure. Press ← to

YES|ENT. All icons will be deleted from the map.

The Delete by Symbol command will launch the Select Symbol menu.

Press ← or ↑ or → or ↓ to select the icon symbol to delete, then press

ENT. A message appears saying all icons with the selected symbol have

been deleted.

The Delete From Map command will prompt you to move the cursor

over an icon to select it. After selecting the icon, press ENT and it dis-

appears from the map.

Navigate to an Icon

Use the cursor to select the desired icon on the map, then use the Navi-

gate to Cursor command.

1. Use arrow keys to center cursor crosshairss over the icon.

2. To navigate to the selected icon location: press MENU|ENT|EXIT. Fol-

low course line on the Map Page or the compass bearing arrow on the

Navigation Page.

Routes

A route is a series of waypoints, linked together in an ordered sequence

to mark a course of travel. You can visualize a route as a string of

beads. The beads represent waypoints and the string represents the

course of travel connecting waypoint to waypoint.

137

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The course from one waypoint to the next is a leg. Routes are composed

of one or more legs. The legs of all GPS routes are based on straight

lines between waypoints.

A route provides the automatic capability to navigate through several

waypoints without having to reprogram the unit after arriving at each

waypoint. Once programmed into the GPS unit, a route provides the

option of navigating forward through the route waypoints or in reverse

order (you can even begin navigating in the middle of a route!)

Create and Save a Route

You have the option of creating and editing a route in the unit or you

can make a route on your computer with our MapCreate 6 software.

PC-created Routes

MapCreate is the easiest method for preparing a route, simply because

your PC's larger screen, keyboard and mouse are easier to manipulate

than the unit.

To load a MapCreate route into the unit, follow instructions in MapCre-

ate's manual for creating a route and saving it as part of a GPS Data File

(file format *.usr). Copy the GPS Data File to an MMC and insert the

MMC in the unit. (See Sec. 2 for instructions on installing MMCs. To load

the GPS Data File into the unit's memory, see the entry on Transfer Cus-

tom Maps & GPS Data Files in Sec. 6, Basic GPS Operations.)

Routes Created in the Unit

You can create a route by selecting existing waypoints from the way-

point list or you can set a series of route waypoints on the map with

cursor arrows and the Enter key. In this example, we'll create a route

from the map.

Route Planning command on Main Menu (left). Routes screen (right).

138

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1. From the NAVIGATION PAGE, press MENU|ENT or from the MAP PAGE,

press MENU|MENU|↓ to ROUTE PLANNING|ENT|ENT.

2. Press ↓ to (END OF ROUTE)|ENT|↓ to ADD FROM MAP|ENT. The Map Page

appears with the cursor showing.

Edit Route menu (left). Edit Route Waypoints menu (right)

with Add From Map command selected.

3. Use the Zoom keys and arrow keys to move the map and cursor until

the cursor is centered on the spot where you want your route to begin.

(If you are starting at your current position or the current cursor posi-

tion, you are already at the starting spot.)

Route creation sequence, from left: Fig. 1. Set route waypoint (1) at

11th St. & 145th Ave. Fig. 2. Zoom in; move cursor north to set point (2)

at 145th & Admiral. Fig. 3. With point (2) set, move cursor east to mark

interstate on-ramp with waypoint (3). In figures 2 and 3, notice the

rubber band line extending from the previously set waypoint to the

cursor. This line will become the course for the route.

139

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4. Set the first route waypoint: press ENT. In this example, we started

our route at the intersection of 11th Street and 145th E. Ave. The route

ends at a public hunting area next to a river. (Our route creation ex-

ample is illustrated in the following figures.)

Route creation sequence, continued: Fig. 4. Point (3) set at on-ramp

turn. Fig. 5. Waypoint (4) set at highway exit to frontage road leading

to river. Waypoint (5) ends the route at a tree stand in the hunting

area. Fig. 6. Press EXIT to save the route and you return to this screen.

5. Move the cursor to the next point in the route, a spot where you need

to turn or change direction, and press ENT to set the next waypoint.

6. Repeat step five until the route reaches your destination.

7. To save your route, press EXIT. The unit reverts to the Edit Route

screen, with the route automatically named "Route 1" and stored in the

unit's internal memory. (In our example, Route 1 already existed, so

the unit automatically made "Route 2.")

You can edit the route and run other commands, but if you are finished

with the route for now, return to the last page displayed by

pressing EXIT repeatedly.

Delete a Route

1. From the NAVIGATION PAGE, press MENU|ENT or from the MAP PAGE press

MENU|MENU|↓ to ROUTE PLANNING|ENT.

2. Press ↓ to route name|ENT.

3. Press ↓ to NAVIGATE|ENT|→ to DELETE|ENT|← to YES|ENT.

Tip:

You can also delete all routes at once:

1. From the NAVIGATION PAGE, press MENU|ENT or from the MAP PAGE

press MENU|MENU|↓ to ROUTE PLANNING|ENT.

2. Press → to DELETE ALL|ENT|← to YES|ENT.

140

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Edit a Route Name

1. From the NAVIGATION PAGE, press MENU|ENT or from the MAP PAGE press

MENU|MENU|↓ to ROUTE PLANNING|ENT.

2. Press ↓ to route name|ENT|ENT.

3. Press ↑ or ↓ to change the first character, then press → to move the

cursor to the next character and repeat until the name is correct, then

press ENT. Return to the previous page by pressing EXIT repeatedly.

Edit Route Waypoints

You can edit the route by adding and removing waypoints.

1. From the NAVIGATION PAGE, press MENU|ENT or from the MAP PAGE press

MENU|MENU|↓ to ROUTE PLANNING|ENT.

2. Press ↓ to route name|ENT|↓ to ROUTE WAYPOINTS LIST. Use ↓ ↑ to se-

lect a waypoint and press ENT.

Edit Route Waypoints menu.

3. Use ↓ ↑ to select a command from the Edit Route Waypoints menu

and press ENT. Add From Map lets you insert a waypoint in the route

by clicking on a map location with the cursor. Add Waypoint calls up

the Waypoint List so you can insert a waypoint from the list. Remove

Waypoint will delete the waypoint from the route. View Waypoint will

show you where the selected waypoint is on the map.

NOTE:

When adding waypoints to a route, the inserted waypoints will ap-

pear in the route in front of the waypoint you have selected. To in-

sert waypoints at the end of the route, make sure to select "(End of

route)" before adding them.

141

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Navigate a Route

1. From the NAVIGATION PAGE, press MENU|ENT or from the MAP PAGE,

press MENU|MENU|↓ to ROUTE PLANNING|ENT.

Route Planning on Main Menu (left). Routes menu (center). Edit Route

menu (right). Navigate is selected on Edit Route menu.

2. Press ↓ to select route name|ENT|↓ to NAVIGATE|ENT.

3. Upon arrival at your destination, cancel navigation:

The following figures show what the Navigation Page and Map Page

look like while navigating a route.

Navigate a Route in Reverse

Here's how you run a route backward, from the end waypoint to the

beginning waypoint:

1. From the NAVIGATION PAGE, press MENU|ENT or from the MAP PAGE,

press MENU|MENU|↓ to ROUTE PLANNING|ENT.

2. Press ↓ to select route name|ENT|↓ to NAVIGATE|→ to RE-

^VERSE|ENT|← to NAVIGATE|ENT.

3. Upon arrival at your destination, cancel navigation:

142

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Figure 1.

Figure 2.

Figure 3.

Figure 4.

Navigating along a route: Fig. 1 shows the Navigation Page at the start

of a route, heading straight for the first waypoint (Wpt 1). In Fig. 2, the

traveler has arrived at Wpt 1; the arrival alarm has been triggered and

the bearing arrow on the compass rose has turned to point toward Wpt

2, off to the east. In Fig. 3 the traveler has turned east on his new

course and is heading straight for Wpt 2, which is 2.37 miles away. Fig.

4 shows route navigation on the Map Page. In this figure, the traveler

has reached Wpt 2 and is half-way along the leg between Wpts 2 and 3.

Trails

Delete a Trail

This

the

command

used

delete

trail:

LETE TRAIL|ENT|← to YES|ENT.

Tip:

You can also delete all trails at once:

1. Press MENU|MENU|↓ to MY TRAILS|ENT.

2. Press → to DELETE ALL|ENT|← to YES|ENT.

143

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Edit a Trail Name

To edit a trail name: press MENU|MENU|↓ to MY TRAILS|ENT|↓ to trail

name|ENT|ENT. Press ↑ or ↓ to change the first character, then press

→ to the next character and repeat until the name is correct. Press ENT

then EXIT repeatedly to return to the previous page display.

Tip:

You can quickly call up the Edit Trail menu by selecting a trail on

the map with the cursor. Simply move the cursor over a trail and a

pop-up box appears. Press WPT and the Edit Trail menu opens.

Trail selected with map cursor (left). The pop-up box shows distance

and bearing from current position to the selected point on the trail.

The Edit Trail menu (right).

Edit a Trail Color

To edit a trail color: press MENU|MENU|↓ to MY TRAILS|ENT|↓ to trail

name|ENT|↓ to COLOR|ENT. Press ↑ or ↓ to select a color style, then press

ENT. Press EXIT repeatedly to return to the previous page display.

Edit a Trail Pattern

To edit a trail pattern: press MENU|MENU|↓ to MY TRAILS|ENT|↓ to trail

name|ENT|↓ to PATTERN|ENT. Press ↑ or ↓ to change the first character,

then press → to the next character and repeat until the pattern is cor-

rect. Press ENT, then EXIT repeatedly to return to the previous page dis-

play.

144

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Edit Trail Menu with Pattern option selected (left). Edited trail with

dotted line pattern (right).

Utilities

Utilities are useful tools for traveling or for outdoor activities.

Alarm Clock

To access the unit's alarm clock: press MENU|MENU|↓ to TIMERS|ENT|↓

to ALARM CLOCK|ENT.

Sun/Moon Rise & Set Calculator

To get to the Sun/Moon menu: press MENU|MENU|↓ to SUN/MOON CALCU-

LATIONS|ENT.

Trip Calculator

To get to the Calculator menu: press MENU|MENU|↓ to TRIP CALCULA-

TOR|ENT.

Trip Down Timer

To get to the Down Timer menu: press MENU|MENU|↓ to TIMERS|ENT|↓

to DOWN TIMER|ENT.

Trip Up Timer

To get to the Up Timer menu: press MENU|MENU|↓ to TIMERS|ENT|ENT.

Waypoints

Delete a Waypoint

To delete a waypoint from waypoint list:

1, Press WPT|ENT|ENT|ENT|↓ to waypoint name|ENT|↓ to DELETE WAY-

^POINT|ENT|← to YES|ENT. To return to the previous page, press

EXIT|EXIT.

145

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To delete a waypoint from the map:

1. Use the arrow keys to select the waypoint with the cursor.

2. Press WPT|↓ to DELETE WAYPOINT|ENT|← to YES|ENT. To return to the

previous page and clear the cursor, press EXIT.

To delete all waypoints at one time:

1. Press MENU|MENU|↓ to SYSTEM SETUP|ENT|↓ to DELETE ALL MY WAY-

^POINTS|ENT|← to YES|ENT. To return to the previous page, press

EXIT|EXIT.

Edit a Waypoint

Waypoint Name

To edit waypoint name:

1. Press WPT|ENT|ENT|ENT|↓ to waypoint name|ENT|↓ to EDIT WAY-

POINT|ENT|ENT.

2. Press ↑ or ↓ to change the first character, then press → to the next

character and repeat until the name is correct. Press ENT then EXIT re-

peatedly to return to the previous page display.

Waypoint Symbol

To edit waypoint symbol:

1. Press WPT|ENT|ENT|ENT|↓ to waypoint name|ENT|↓ to EDIT WAY-

^POINT|ENT|↓ to CHOOSE SYMBOL|ENT.

2. Use arrow keys to select desired symbol and press ENT. To return to

the previous page, press EXIT repeatedly.

Waypoint Position

To edit waypoint position:

1. Press WPT|ENT|ENT|ENT|↓ to waypoint name|ENT|↓ to EDIT WAY-

^POINT|ENT.

2. Latitude: press → to LATITUDE|ENT. Press ↑ or ↓ to change the first

character, then press → to the next character and repeat until the lati-

tude is correct. Press EXIT.

3. Longitude: press ↓ to LONGITUDE|ENT. Press ↑ or ↓ to change the first

character, then press → to the next character and repeat until the lon-

gitude is correct. Press EXIT.

4. When latitude and longitude are correct, return to the previous page:

press EXIT repeatedly.

146

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Selecting a Waypoint

To select a waypoint on the map (for navigating to, for editing, etc.,) use

the arrow keys and center the cursor over the waypoint. A highlighted

halo will appear around the waypoint.

Create Waypoint by Entering a Position

1. Press WPT|→ to SUBCATEGORY column|↓ to NEW|ENT.

2. Press ↓ to ENTERED POSITION|ENT|→ to CREATE|ENT.

3. Press → to LATITUDE|ENT. Enter the latitude by pressing ↑ or ↓ to

change the first character, then press → to the next character and re-

peat until the latitude is correct. Press ENT.

New Waypoint screen (left). Edit Waypoint menu with Latitude high-

lighted (right).

4. Press ↓ to LONGITUDE|ENT. Enter the longitude by pressing ↑ ↓ to

change the first character, then press → to the next character and repeat

until the longitude is correct. Press ENT. To edit the waypoint's name,

altitude, depth or symbol, proceed to Step 5. If you want to see the way-

point on the map, press EXIT, select GO TO WAYPOINT or FIND ON MAP and

press ENT. If you select Go to Waypoint, a route will be automatically be

created directing you to the new waypoint. If you choose Find on Map,

the map screen will appear with the cursor crosshairss centered on the

waypoint you created.

5. You can edit the waypoint's Name, Altitude or Depth by highlighting

the desired category and pressing ENT. Use ↑ ↓ to change the first

character, then press → to the next character and repeat until the de-

sired name, altitude or depth has been entered. Press ENT.

6. To edit the waypoint's symbol, highlight CHOOSE SYMBOL and press

ENT. The Icon Window will appear with 63 symbols. Select the desired

symbol and press ENT.

147

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

7. Press EXIT, which will open the Waypoint Information menu with up

to four options: Go To Waypoint, Find on Map, Edit Waypoint and De-

lete Waypoint. Select the desired option and press ENT.

Set a Waypoint by Average Position

This feature sets a waypoint at the current position after taking several

position readings and averaging them. This boosts waypoint position

accuracy by helping to eliminate errors caused by atmospheric condi-

tions and other factors.

1. Press WPT|→ to SUBCATEGORY column|↓ to NEW|ENT.

2. Press ↓ or ↑ to AVERAGE POSITION|ENT|press → to CREATE|ENT.

3. Wait while the unit takes points to average for the position. (The

greater the number of points, the greater the accuracy.) When the desired

number of points accumulates, press ENT to create and save the waypoint.

4. The Edit Waypoint menu appears. You can simply save the waypoint

by pressing EXIT|EXIT or you can edit the waypoint.

Set a Waypoint by Projecting a Position

This feature sets a waypoint at a point located a specific distance and

bearing from a reference position. The reference position can be se-

lected from your waypoint list, a map feature or from the Points of In-

terest list.

1. Press WPT|→ to SUBCATEGORY column|↓ to NEW|ENT.

2. Press ↓ to PROJECTED POSITION|ENT|→ to CREATE|ENT.

3. Press → to CHOOSE REFERENCE|ENT. Use ↑ and ↓ to select a waypoint,

map feature or Point of Interest. When the point has been selected,

press ENT and you will be directed to the Waypoint information menu.

There will be two options: Set Reference or Find on Map. Highlight Set

Reference and press Enter.

4. Press ↓ to DISTANCE|ENT. Press ↑ or ↓ to change the first character,

then press → to the next character and repeat until the distance is cor-

rect. Press ENT.

5. Press ↓ to BEARING|ENT. Press ↑ or ↓ to change the first character,

then press → to the next character and repeat until the bearing is cor-

rect. Press ENT.

6. Press ↑ to PROJECT|ENT. The Edit Waypoint menu appears. You can

simply save the new projected waypoint by pressing EXIT|EXIT or you

can edit the waypoint. (Press EXIT|ENT if you want to immediately be-

gin navigating to the new waypoint.)

148

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Section 8:

System & GPS Setup Options

Alarms

This unit has several GPS alarms. The factory default setting has all of

these but the anchor alarm turned on. You can turn the alarms off and

on and change their distance settings.

You can set an arrival alarm to flash a warning message and sound a

tone when you cross a preset distance from a waypoint. For example, if

you have the arrival alarm set to .1 mile, then the alarm will flash a

message when you come within .1 mile of the recalled waypoint.

The off course alarm warns you when your track drifts too far to the

right or left of the course line to the waypoint. For example, if the

alarm is set to .1 mile, then the alarm flashes a message if you drift .1

of a mile or more to the right or left of the line to the waypoint.

The anchor alarm is triggered when you drift outside of a preset radius.

Again, using the .1 mile as an example, if you're anchored and your

boat moves more than .1 of a mile, the alarm will flash a message and

sound a tone.

Alarms command (left). Alarm menu (right).

To change alarm settings:

1. Press MENU|MENU|↓ to ALARMS|ENT|ENT.

2. Scroll ↓ ↑ to select the desired category, then press ENT to check or

clear the Enabled box. This turns the alarm on (checked) or off (un-

checked.)

149

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3. To change distance settings, scroll ↓ ↑ to select the desired category,

then press → |ENT to activate the distance dialog box. Use ↑ ↓ to

change the first character, then press → to the next character and re-

peat until the name is correct.

4. When your adjustments are finished, return to the last page dis-

played by repeatedly pressing EXIT.

IMPORTANT ALARM NOTES

Anchor Alarm - The anchor alarm may be triggered even when you

are sitting still. This typically happens when using small (less than

.05 mile) anchor alarm ranges.

Arrival Alarm - If you set the arrival alarm's distance to a small

number and you run a route (see the Navigate Routes segment),

this unit may not show navigation data to the next waypoint, once

you arrive at the first one. You may not be able to come close

enough to the first waypoint to trip the arrival alarm.

Auto Satellite Search

To lock on to the satellites, the GPS receiver needs to know its current

position, UTC time and date. (Elevation [altitude] is also used in the

equation, but it's rarely required to determine a position.) It needs this

data so that it can calculate which satellites should be in view. It then

searches for only those satellites.

When your GPS receiver is turned on for the first time, it doesn't know

what your position or elevation (altitude) is. It does know the current UTC

time and date since these were programmed into it at the factory and an

internal clock keeps the time while the unit is turned off. (If the time

and/or date are incorrect, you can set them using the "Set Local Time"

menu.)

The unit begins searching for the satellites using the above data that it

acquired the last time it was turned on. This probably was at the fac-

tory. Since it's almost certain that you're not at our factory, it's proba-

bly looking for the wrong satellites.

If it doesn't find the satellites it's looking for after approximately one

minute, it switches to Auto Search. The receiver looks for any satellite

in the sky. Due to advanced technology, the auto search time has

shrunk significantly from the early days of GPS.

Once the unit locks on to the satellites, it should take less than a minute

to find your position the next time it's turned on, as long as you are ap-

proximately 100 miles from the last location it was used.

150

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MMC File Browser.

Check MMC Files and Storage Space

To check MMC Files:

1. Press MENU|MENU|↓ to BROWSE MMC FILES|ENT.

2. Use↑ ↓ to browse through the files. Highlight a file and press ENT to

select it.

3. Press EXIT repeatedly to return to the main display.

Communications Port Configuration

The unit has one NMEA 0183 version 2.0 compatible communication

port, or com port for short. The Com Port Menu, which is accessed from

the System Setup Menu, allows you to configure the communications

port to send or receive data from another electronic device, such as an

autopilot. The com port can be used for either NMEA, or SiRF Binary

data transfer.

Communications Port highlighted on System Setup menu (left). Baud

Rate selected on Communications Port menu (right).

151

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

For connectors and wiring information for another device, see page 34.

For assistance in configuring the unit to communicate with another

device, consult the factory. Customer service phone numbers are in the

back of this manual.

Configure NMEA

You can configure the unit to use specific NMEA sentences.

1. Press MENU|MENU|↓ to SYSTEM SETUP|ENT.

2. Press ↓ to COMMUNICATIONS PORT|ENT|↓ to CONFIGURE NMEA|ENT.

3. A menu appears showing the prefixes of the available NMEA sen-

tences. A check mark next to a prefix means the prefix is in use. Use ↑

↓, ← → to select a prefix, then press ENT to turn off the prefix. (Press

ENT again to check the box and turn on a prefix.)

4. When the desired prefixes are checked or unchecked, press EXIT re-

peatedly to return to the previous page.

NOTE:

Placing a check in the checkbox next to Radar at the bottom of the

Communications Port menu will set the Baud Rate to the default

Radar Baud Rate setting.

Coordinate System Selection

The Coordinate System Menu lets you select the coordinate system to

use when displaying and entering position coordinates.

Menus for changing coordinate system used to display positions.

To get to Coordinate System Selection:

1. Press MENU|MENU|↓ to GPS SETUP|ENT.

2. Press ↓ to COORDINATE SYSTEM|ENT.

This unit can show a position in degrees (36.14952°); degrees, minutes

and thousandths of a minute (36° 28.700'); or degrees, minutes, seconds

and tenths of a second (36° 28' 40.9"). It can also show position in: UTM

152

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

(Universal Transverse Mercator) projection; MGRS (Standard); MGRS

(Standard + 10); Map Fix; Loran TD; British, Irish, Finnish, German,

New Zealand, Swedish, Swiss, Taiwan and Greek.

UTM's are marked on USGS topographic charts. This system divides

the Earth into 60 zones, each 6 degrees wide in longitude.

British, Irish, Finnish, German, New Zealand, Swedish, Swiss, Taiwan,

and Greek grid systems are the national coordinate system used only in

their respective countries. In order to use these grid systems, you must

be in the respective country. This unit will pick the matching datum for

you when you select the grid. See the entry on Map Datum Selection for

more information.

The Military Grid Reference System (MGRS) uses two grid lettering

schemes, which are referred to as standard and standard + 10 MGRS

on this unit. Your position and datum in use determines which one to

use. If you use standard, and your position is off significantly, then try

the alternate.

NOTE:

When the position format is changed, it affects the way all positions

are shown on all screens. This includes waypoints.

To change the coordinate system

1. Press ENT while COORDINATE SYSTEM is highlighted.

2. Use ↑ ↓ to highlight the desired format and press ENT. Press EXIT

repeatedly to return to the map display.

To set up Loran TD:

If the Loran TD conversion is chosen, you must enter the local Loran

chain identification for the master and slaves. Highlight SETUP LORAN TD

at the bottom of the Coordinate System menu and select the ID. Press

EXIT to close this menu.

153

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Configure Loran TD menu.

Map Fix

Map Fix is used with charts or maps. This system asks for a reference

position in latitude/longitude, which you take from a marked location

on the map. It then shows the present position as distance on the map

from that reference point.

For example, if it shows a distance of UP 4.00" and LEFT 0.50", you

then measure up four inches and to the left a half-inch from the refer-

ence point on the map to find your location.

To configure a map fix:

To use this format, you need to follow these steps in order. First, take

your map of the area and determine a reference latitude/longitude.

(Note: in order for this system to work, the latitude/longitude lines

must be parallel with the edge of the map. USGS maps are parallel,

others may not be. Also, this works better with smaller scale maps,

such as 1:24000.) The reference position can be anywhere on the map,

but the closer it is to your location, the smaller the numbers will be

that you'll have to deal with.

Once you've decided on a reference position, you can save it as a waypoint.

See the waypoint section for information on saving a waypoint. Save the

reference position as a waypoint. Exit from the waypoint screens.

1. Press MENU|MENU|↓ to GPS SETUP|ENT.

2. Press ↓ to COORDINATE SYSTEM|ENT.

3. Press ↓ to SETUP MAP FIX|ENT. The screen below appears, and MAP

SCALE is highlighted.

154

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4. Press ENT and enter the map's scale. This is generally at the bottom

of the paper map. It is shown as a ratio, like 1:24000. Press EXIT and

the unit to return to the Configure Map Fix screen.

Configure a map fix so the unit can find your position on a printed

chart or topographical map.

5. Press → to SELECT ORIGIN|ENT|ENT|ENT to bring up the waypoint list.

Select the waypoint that you saved the reference point under and press

ENT. The unit displays a waypoint information screen with the com-

mand SET AS ORIGIN selected.

6. Press ENT and the unit returns to the Configure Map Fix menu. Fi-

nally, press EXIT to close this menu.

7. Press ↑ to COORD SYSTEM|ENT, select MAP FIX from the list and press

ENT|EXIT. All position information now shows as a distance from the

reference point you chose.

Customize Page Displays

Every Page display option except Full Map (on the Map Page) has cus-

tomizable data boxes to provide constant on-screen information.

The data available from your unit is divided into categories in the Data

Viewer menu. These categories include GPS Data, Navigation, Trip

Calculator, Time, Sonar and Miscellaneous. You can select items from

any of these categories for display in any data box — the category divi-

sions are only there to help you sort through the information.

To change the information displayed in a data box:

1. On the Page display you wish to change, press MENU|↓ to CUSTOM-

IZE|ENT. A data box name flashes, indicating it is selected.

2. Press ENT to change the box or hit ↑, ↓, ← → to select another box, then

press ENT. You will see a list of categories with "+" or "–" symbols next to

each category. A category with a "+" is expandable, meaning its contents

are hidden.

155

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Customize Menu, with "GPS Data" and "Navigation" categories expanded.

Selecting the category name and pressing ENT will show the category's

contents, so you can choose items within it. An expanded category (one

with a "–" next to its name) can be collapsed to hide its contents. Just

select the category name and press ENT.

3. Expand any categories that might contain data you want to display.

Press ↓ ↑ to select a different data option.

4. With the new option highlighted, press ENT to switch the contents of

the box to the new data type and press EXIT. You can now select an-

other box to change. When you are finished with the settings, press

EXIT again to end the Customize command, and the box name stops

flashing.

NOTE:

A Page display can show a limited number of data boxes. You can

not add or remove data boxes.

GPS Simulator

The GPS simulator lets you use the unit as if you were outdoors navigat-

ing somewhere. It's a great way to practice using your unit. You can set

the starting location by entering latitude/longitude (Starting Position) or

from a stored waypoint, map place or POI. You can steer your position

and change speed on the map by using the arrow keys (STEER WITH ARROWS

command) or by setting the track and speed in the dialog boxes provided

on the simulator menu screen.

To turn on the GPS Simulator:

1. Press MENU|MENU, highlight SYSTEM SETUP and press ENT.

2. Select SIMULATORS and press ENT.

156

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The GPS Simulator menu.

The GPS Simulator page will appear. The page has dialog boxes that

allow you to change the Track, Speed, Altitude, Latitude and Longitude

of your simulation.

You can begin your simulation at a waypoint by using the Select Start-

ing Waypoint command or direct the simulation manually by using the

Steer with Arrows command, which will place Steer with Arrow boxes

on the main display.

Tip:

The Initialize GPS command offers another way to choose a desired

location to begin a simulation. The Initializing GPS command al-

lows you to move the center display arrow to any location on the

map. We will explore the Initialize GPS command in more detail in

the Initialize GPS entry below.

3. When all settings have been set to your preferences, turn on the

simulator on by highlighting the GPS SIMULATOR ON box and pressing

ENT. Press EXIT repeatedly to return to the map display. Repeat Steps

1-3 to turn off the simulator.

NOTE:

A message and tone appear periodically, warning you that the

simulator is on. To turn the simulator off, repeat the above steps or

turn the unit off.

Steer with Arrows

When you are using the Steer with Arrows command, you can press

EXIT to clear the steering and speed boxes from the screen while con-

tinuing the simulation. This action will allow you to use the map cursor

during a simulation. To turn steering and speed boxes back on again,

157

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

return to the GPS Simulator menu, highlight the STEER WITH ARROWS

command, press ENT. Press EXIT repeatedly to return to the previous

page.

Simulating Trail or Route Navigation

In Simulator mode, your unit can automatically follow a trail or route

without manual steering if you use these steps:

1. From the Map Page, go to the simulator menu. Pick a STARTING POSI-

TION at or near the beginning of your trail/route. Enter an approximate

TRACK (shown in compass degrees) that will point you toward the start

of the trail/route.

2. Set SPEED to zero. Select STEER WITH ARROWS command and press ENT,

which turns on the simulator and returns you to the Map Page.

3. Begin navigating along the trail/route. (If you are close enough to the

first waypoint, the arrival alarm will usually go off as soon as naviga-

tion begins. Press EXIT to clear the alarm.) When navigation starts,

press ↑ to increase speed to the desired setting.

4. Press EXIT to turn off the steering and speed boxes. The unit will now

automatically steer along the trail or route. Cancel navigation when

you arrive at your destination.

Hide GPS Feature

If there is no GPS antenna/receiver module attached to this unit, the

GPS menus and features can be hidden from view with this command.

The default setting is off, allowing you to rotate between the Sonar

Page and the GPS pages and features.

To Hide GPS Features:

1. Press MENU|MENU|↓ to SYSTEM SETUP|ENT.

2. Highlight HIDE GPS FEATURES and press ENT. The GPS menus and

pages are now hidden.

To restore GPS Features, press MENU|MENU|↓ to SHOW GPS FEA-

^TURES|ENT. The GPS menus and pages are available once again.

Initialize GPS

This command is handy when you are practicing in simulator mode. (See

the entry in this section for GPS Simulator.) In simulator mode, this

command makes the unit operate as if it is sitting someplace other than

its actual location. So, you and your unit could be located in Kansas City,

but easily practice navigating in the ocean off Islamorada, Florida.

158

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To Initialize GPS:

1. Press MENU|MENU|↓ to GPS SETUP|ENT|ENT.

2. A message appears, prompting you to move the cursor to the desired

location. Move the cursor to the desired location and press ENT.

When the message automatically clears, follow the message instruc-

tions.

3. In a moment, your present position marker arrow appears on the

map in the location you selected with the cursor. The unit will consider

that spot as its last known position until changed by either a live satel-

lite lock-on or a new simulator location.

Map Auto Zoom

This unit has an auto zoom feature that eliminates much of the button

pushing common with other brands of GPS receivers. It works in con-

junction with the navigation features.

First, start navigation to a waypoint. (See the waypoint section for

more information on navigating to a waypoint.) Then, with the auto

zoom mode on, the unit zooms out until the entire course shows, from

the present position to the destination waypoint. As you travel toward

the destination, the unit automatically begins zooming in — one zoom

range at a time — always keeping the destination on the screen.

To turn on Auto Zoom:

1. From a MAP PAGE, press MENU|↓ to AUTO ZOOM|ENT|EXIT. Repeat

these steps to turn it off.

Map Data

This menu lets you turn the map off, if desired (which turns the map

screen into a GPS plotter); turn off or on the pop-up map info boxes;

draw the map boundaries or boxes around the areas of high detail; or

fill land areas with gray. You can also turn on or off Map Overlays,

which display latitude and longitude grid lines or range rings on the

map. This menu also lets you select Navionics Maps. For instructions,

see the Navionics Charts entry in this section.

159

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Map Menu (left). Map Data Menu (right).

To access Map Data menu:

From the Map Page, press MENU|↓ to MAP DATA|ENT.

To show Map Data

1. From the Map Page, press MENU|↓ to MAP DATA|ENT.

2. Press ENT to open the EARTH MAP DETAIL selection list, and choose how

much detail you want — from Off (so the unit operates like a GPS plot-

ter) to High.

3. After the option is set, press EXIT repeatedly to return to the page

display.

To turn on/off Pop-up Map Information

1. From the Map Page, press MENU|↓ to MAP DATA|ENT.

2. Press ↓ to POPUP MAP INFORMATION. With the option highlighted, press

ENT to check it (turn on) or uncheck it (turn off.)

3. After the option is set, press EXIT|EXIT to return to the page display.

To turn on/off Draw Map Boundaries

1. From the Map Page, press MENU|↓ to MAP DATA|ENT.

2. Press ↓ to DRAW MAP BOUNDARIES. With the option highlighted, press

ENT to check it (turn on) or uncheck it (turn off.)

3. After the option is set, press EXIT|EXIT to return to the page display.

To turn on/off Fill Water With White

1. From the Map Page, press MENU|↓ to MAP DATA|ENT.

2. Press ↓ to FILL WATER WITH WHITE. With the option highlighted, press

ENT to check it (turn on) or uncheck it (turn off.)

3. After the option is set, press EXIT|EXIT to return to the page display.

160

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Map Overlays (Range Rings; Lat/Long Grid)

The map screen can be customized with four range rings and/or grids

that divide the plotter into equal segments of latitude and longitude.

Range rings are handy for visually estimating distances on the map. The

ring diameters are based on the current zoom range. For example: at the

100 mile zoom, the screen will show two rings with your current position

in the center. The large ring touching the left and right sides of the

screen is 100 miles in diameter (same as the zoom range). The second

smaller ring is 50 miles in diameter (always 1/2 the zoom range).

The distance from your current position to the smaller ring (the ring's

radius) is 25 miles (always 1/4 the zoom range). With the arrow keys

and map cursor, you can scroll the map to see the third and fourth

rings. In this example, the distance to the third ring is 75 miles and

distance to the fourth ring is 100 miles from your current position.

To turn on/off range rings:

1. From the Map Page, press MENU|↓ to MAP DATA|ENT.

2. Press ↓, → to RANGE RINGS. With the option highlighted, press ENT to

check it (turn on) and uncheck it (turn off.)

3. After the option is set, press EXIT|EXIT to return to the page display.

To turn on/off Lat/Long Grid lines:

1. From the Map Page, press MENU|↓ to MAP DATA|ENT.

2. Press ↓, to LAT/LON GRID LINES. With the option highlighted, press ENT

to check it (turn on) and uncheck it (turn off.)

3. After the option is set, press EXIT|EXIT to return to the page display.

Map Datum Selection

Maps and charts are based on a survey of an area covered by the map

or chart. These surveys are called Datums. Maps using different da-

tums will show the same latitude/longitude in different locations.

All datums are named. The GPS system is based on the WGS-84 da-

tum, which covers the entire world. Other datums may also cover the

entire world, or just a small portion of it. By default, your unit uses the

WGS-84 datum. It, however, can show your position using any of 191

datums. Different datums can be selected. To change the datum:

2. Use ↓ ↑ to select the desired datum, then press ENT.

3. To return to the last page displayed, press EXIT|EXIT.

A list of the datums used by this unit is in the back of this manual.

161

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The Map Datum Menu.

Map Detail Category Selection

This menu determines which of the mapping features are shown on the

screen. This includes: waypoints, trails, icons, cities, highways, etc. You

can turn on or off any of these items to customize the map.

To get to Map Categories:

1. From the Map Page, press MENU|↓ to MAP CATEGORIES DRAWN|ENT.

2. Press ↑ ↓ to select a category or press → then press ↑ ↓ to select a

subcategory. Press ENT to turn it off (no check) or on (checked.)

3. To return to the map display, press EXIT|EXIT.

The Map Categories Drawn Menu.

Map Orientation

By default, this receiver shows the map with north always at the top of

the screen. This is the way most maps and charts are printed on paper.

162

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

In Track Up mode, map shows "N" and arrow to indicate north.

Map page shown in North Up mode (left) Map page shown in Track Up

mode (right).

This is fine if you are always traveling due north. What you see to your

left corresponds to the left side of the map, to your right is shown on

the right side of the map, and so on. However, if you travel any other

direction, the map doesn't line up with your view of the world.

To correct this problem, a track-up mode rotates the map as you turn.

Thus, what you see on the left side of the screen should always be to

your left, and so on.

Another option is course-up mode, which keeps the map at the same

orientation as the initial bearing to the waypoint. When either the

track-up or course-up mode is on, a "N" shows on the map screen to

help you see which direction is north.

To change map orientation:

1. From the Map Page, press MENU|↓ to MAP ORIENTATION|ENT.

2. Use ↑ ↓ to select the desired mode, then press ENT.

3. Press EXIT|EXIT to return to the map page display.

163

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Map Orientation menu with

the North Up map orientation option selected.

NOTE

In North Up and Course Up, the present position arrow appears in

the center of the map page. In Track Up, the position arrow ap-

pears centered in the lower third of the page.

NauticPath™ USA Marine Charts

Your unit can display NauticPath electronic charts on MMCs. They

work just like a MapCreate custom map on a MMC.

Nautical Chart Notes

NauticPath charts contain notes or chart information, represented by

circle-i Chart Note icons on the map display. An example is shown in

the following figure.

NauticPath chart showing Chart Note icon selected by cursor (left).

Note information screen (right).

164

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To view Chart Note information:

1. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor over a Chart Note icon. When

it's selected, a pop-up name box appears.

2. Press WPT to display the Note Information screen.

3. To scroll through the Chart Note screen, use ↑ ↓ arrow keys to read

the information. To return to the main page display, press EXIT repeat-

edly.

Entrance to Aransas Pass on a NauticPath chart with 8-nautical mile

zoom (left). Remaining images (left to right): same position at 4-

nautical mile, 1-nautical mile and 0.3- nautical mile zoom ranges.

Port Information

NauticPath charts contain Port Services information, represented by

anchor icons on the map display. These icons will appear when you are

zoomed in to a 4-nautical mile range. An example is displayed in the

following figures.

To view Port Services information:

1. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor over a Port Services icon.

When it is selected, a pop-up name box appears.

2. Press WPT to display the Port Services Information screen.

165

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Pop-up

name box

Port Services

icon

NauticPath chart showing Port Services icon selected by cursor. When

first highlighted, the Pop-Up name box appears.

The Port Services information screen for a NauticPath chart contains

all the service information in one window.

3. To scroll through the service information window, use ↑ ↓ to see the

types of services available. To return to the main page display, press

EXIT repeatedly.

Port Services information.

Tidal Current Information

NauticPath charts contain Tidal Current information,

represented at large zoom ranges by a box icon with

the letter "C." These icons will appear when you are

zoomed in to a 6-mile range. The icon stands for a Tidal Current Sta-

tion location. An example is displayed on the right.

When you zoom in to a sufficiently small zoom range (0.8 nautical

mile), the icon becomes an animated arrow showing tidal current veloc-

ity and direction for the selected tidal station at the present time. At

166

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

larger zoom ranges, you can select the boxed "C" icon and it becomes an

animated arrow with a pop-up name box (the name box disappears af-

ter a few seconds). Examples are displayed in the following figures.

To view Tidal Current information:

1. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor over a Tidal Current Station

icon. When it is selected, a pop-up name box appears.

2. Press WPT to display the Tidal Current Information screen.

Cursor

lines

Tidal Current

Station icon in

animated mode

NauticPath chart showing Tidal Current Station icon selected by cur-

sor (left). Tidal Current animated icon at .8-nautical mile range.

Current Time Line

Slack

Water

Line

Velocity

Scale

Tide Tables

Current Information screen.

The Tidal Current Information screen displays daily tidal current data

for this station on this date at the present time. The graph at the top of

the screen is an approximate view of the flood and ebb pattern for the

day, from midnight (MN), to noon (NN) to midnight (MN).

167

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The velocity scale at the top left side of the graph changes dynamically

based upon the maximum velocity of the current for that day.

Slack water, the period of little or no current, is represented by the

Slack Water Line (SWL). The flood appears above the SWL and the ebb

appears below the SWL. You can look up tidal current data for other

dates by changing the month, day and year selection boxes.

To select another date:

1. Use ← → to highlight month, day or year, then press ENT.

2. Use ↑ ↓ to select the desired month, day or year and press ENT.

To clear the information screen, press EXIT.

Tide Information

NauticPath charts contain Tidal Information, repre-

sented at large zoom ranges by a box icon with the

letter "T." These icons will appear when you are

zoomed in to a 6-mile range. The icon stands for a

Tidal Station location. An example is displayed at right.

When you zoom in to a sufficiently small zoom range (0.8 nautical

mile), the icon becomes an animated gauge showing a rising or falling

tidal height for the selected station at the present time. At larger zoom

ranges, you can select the boxed "T" icon and it becomes an animated

gauge with a pop-up name box. The name box disappears seconds.

Tide Station

icon in ani-

mated mode

Cursor

lines

NauticPath chart showing Tide Station icon selected by cursor (left).

Icon animates automatically without selection at the 0.8-mile zoom

range (right). In the example above, the tide is at 0.9 feet and falling,

as shown by the down arrow at the top of the icon.

168

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To view tide information:

1. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor over a tide station icon. When

it is selected, a pop-up name box appears.

2. Press WPT to display the Tide Information screen.

Current Time Line

Height

Scale

MLLW

Line

Tide

Table

Tide Information screen.

The Tide Information screen displays daily tidal data for this station on

this date at the present time. The graph at the top of the screen is an

approximate view of the tidal range pattern for the day, from midnight

(MN) to noon (NN) to midnight (MN). The dotted line across the graph

is the Mean Lower Low Water line (MLLW).

The height scale on the top right side of the graph changes, based upon

the maximum range of the tide for that day. The MLLW line also ad-

justs its position as the height scale changes.

You can look up tidal data for other dates by changing the month, day

and year selection boxes. To select another date:

1. Use ← → to highlight month, day or year, then press ENT.

2. Use ↑ ↓ to select the desired month, day or year and press ENT.

To clear the information screen, press EXIT.

Navionics^®Charts

Your unit can also display Navionics electronic charts on MMCs. Like

NauticPath, Navionics charts contain tide and port service information.

NOTE:

The primary operational difference between a NauticPath chart

and a Navionics chart is the way the chart data is set up for dis-

play. NauticPath charts are ready for display as soon as they are

169

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

inserted into the unit. Navionics charts must be inserted into the

unit, then selected as a Map Choice option in the Map Data menu.

To display a Navionics chart:

1. Install the Navionics MMC in the memory card compartment and

turn on the unit. (For full card install instructions, see Sec. 2.)

2. From the Map Page, press MENU|↓ to MAP DATA|ENT|↓ to MAP

CHOICE|ENT. Select the Map Name, then press ENT|EXIT|EXIT.

Navionics Map Choice highlighted. Press Ent to select the desired

Navionics map from the Map Choice drop down box.

WARNING:

You should never format the MMC containing your

Navionics chart. Formatting the MMC will permanently

erase the chart from the card.

Overlay Data

On any Page display except Satellite Status, you can overlay additional

GPS or navigation data on the screen with the Overlay Data command.

For example, if you left your watch at home, you could display the local

time on top of the map. Or, if you wanted to see details about your

route and trip, you could show your bearing, course, average speed and

trip distance.

The various data available from your unit are divided into categories in

the Overlay Data menu. These categories include GPS Data, Naviga-

tion, Trip Calculator, Time, Sonar Data and Miscellaneous Data.

You can select items from any of these categories for display, in any

combination — the category divisions are there only to help you sort

through the information.

170

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Overlay Data with Navigation and Sonar Data

categories expanded.

To overlay information on your screen:

1. Press MENU|↓ to OVERLAY DATA|ENT.

2. If you currently have any overlay data on your screen, it will be

listed here. Select (ENTER TO ADD) and press ENT. The data viewer shows

information categories with "+" or "–" symbols next to each category

name. A category with a "+" next to it is expandable, meaning its con-

tents are hidden.

Selecting the category name and pressing ENT will show the category's

contents, so you can choose items within it. An expanded category (one

with a "–" next to its name) can be collapsed to hide its contents. Just

select the category name and press ENT.

3. Expand any categories that might contain data you want to display.

Then press ↓ or ↑ to select a data option.

4. With the data option highlighted, press ENT to check it (turn on) and

uncheck it (turn off). As you turn it on, the data will appear on top of

the screen. Every Page display has a maximum number of items you

can show using the Overlay Data command.

5. After the desired changes are made, press EXIT|EXIT to return to the

page display.

171

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

From Overlay Data Shown (left) press ENT to see Data Viewer (center).

Select a category and press ENT. Next, select information to show on

screen and press ENT to check it and turn it on (right).

Steering

arrow

Map Page shows boat cruising Puget Sound, Washington with Overlay

Data turned on (left). This example shows Depth, Ground Speed and

the Steering Arrow. Note that the Steering Arrow always points di-

rectly to the destination you are navigating toward. In this case, the

boater is on a northwest course of 275º. Since the helmsman is on

course, the Steering Arrow is pointing straight ahead. If the helmsman

veered off course, the arrow would show which direction to steer to

get back on course. Sonar Page with Overlay Data turned on (right),

showing Depth, Ground Speed and the Track the boat is following.

To remove overlaid data:

1. While on the Page that shows the item or items you want to remove,

press MENU|↓ to OVERLAY DATA|ENT.

2. You will see a list of the overlay data currently displayed. Select the

item you want to remove from your display and press ENT|ENT to re-

move the data. To remove another item, highlight the item and press

ENT|ENT.

3. When you have finished removing Overlay Data, press EXIT to return

to the map page display.

172

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

NOTE:

You also can remove data directly from the Data Viewer menu by

repeating the steps used to add overlay data. Highlight the overlay

data currently displayed, then press ENT, unchecking the data op-

tion, which will remove it from the display..

Overlay Data Shown, with Date option selected (left). Press ENT to ac-

cess REMOVE option (center). Press ENT again to remove item and return

to Overlay Data Shown (right).

To move overlaid data:

You may find it useful to move or rearrange overlay data on your dis-

play.

1. From one of the Map Pages, press MENU|↓ to OVERLAY DATA|ENT.

2. You will see a list of the overlay data currently displayed. Select the

item you want to move and press ENT|→ to MOVE|ENT.

3. The data begins to flash on your screen. Use ↑ ↓, ← → to move the

data to a new location on the screen.

4. Press EXIT|EXIT to return to the map display.

NOTE:

The Customize command and the Overlay Data command both use

the same information categories. The difference between the two

commands is that Customize changes only the data in digital data

boxes, while Overlay Data changes the data on the floating freely

on the screen but does not alter data in digital data boxes. For in-

formation on customizing digital data boxes see Customize Page

Displays on page 86.

173

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Trip Distance set to small size in the Overlay Data Shown menu (left).

Trip Distance set to Large size (right).

To change displayed data font size:

1. From the Map or Sonar page, press MENU|↓ to OVERLAY DATA|ENT.

2. Press ↓ ↑ to select the desired data type, then use ← → to enlarge or

reduce the size of the overlay data on the map display.

3. Press EXIT to return to the map display. The selected data type will

be displayed in the new size. (To change the font size for another Data

Type, repeat these steps, beginning with step 2 above.)

NOTE:

Some data types can be displayed in only one font size. If that is the

case, the Data Size box will not be displayed for that data type.

Pop-up Help

Help is available for virtually all menus in this unit. By leaving a menu

item or command highlighted for a few seconds, a pop-up message will

appear, giving a brief description of the functions purpose. This feature

is on by default.

To set up Popup Help:

1. Press MENU|MENU|↓ to SYSTEM SETUP|ENT|↓ to POPUP HELP.

2. With the option highlighted, press ENT to check it (turn on) and un-

check it (turn off.)

3. After the option is set, press EXIT|EXIT to return to the page display.

174

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Pop-up Help command highlighted on System Setup menu (left). Pop-

up Help message for Sounds (right).

Reset Options

The Reset Options command allows you to switch unit features and

functions back to factory default settings.

1. Press MENU|MENU|↓ to SYSTEM SETUP|ENT|↓ to RESET OPTIONS|ENT|←

to YES|ENT.

NOTE:

Reset Options does not erase any waypoints, routes, icons, plot trails

or sonar logs.

Reset Options highlighted on the System Setup menu (left). Reset Op-

tions confirmation message (right).

175

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Screen Contrast and Brightness

To adjust Contrast:

1. Press MENU|MENU|ENT.

2. Highlight CONTRAST, then use ← → to move the contrast adjustment

bar. The left end of the scale is the lowest contrast level. The right end

is the highest contrast level.

The Screen Menu with Contrast bar selected.

To adjust the display's brightness:

1. Press MENU|MENU|ENT.

2. Press ↓ to BRIGHTNESS. Press ← → to move Brightness Control bar.

The left end of the scale is the lowest brightness level. The right end of

the scale is the highest brightness level.

Display Mode menu.

176

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To adjust the screen's display mode:

1. Press MENU|MENU|ENT.

2. Press ↓ to DISPLAY MODE|ENT, which will open the Display Mode menu

with three options: Normal, High Contrast and Night Viewing.

3. Select the desired mode and press ENT. Press EXIT|EXIT to return to

the map display.

Set Language

This unit's menus are available in 10 languages: English, French, Ger-

man, Spanish, Italian, Danish, Swedish, Russian, Dutch and Finnish.

To select a different language:

1. Press MENU|MENU|↓ to SYSTEM SETUP|ENT.

2. Highlight SET LANGUAGE|ENT.

3. Use ↓ ↑ to select the desired language and press ENT. All menus now

will appear in the language you selected.

Set Local Time

Using the local time setting is useful when estimating local arrival

time while navigating.

1. Make sure your unit has acquired your position, then press

MENU|MENU, highlight SYSTEM SETUP and ENT.

2. Highlight SET LOCAL TIME and press ENT.

3. Local time will be highlighted, so press ENT. Use ↑ ↓ to change the

first character, then press → to move the cursor to the next character.

Repeat those steps until the time has been set. Press ENT.

To set the Month:

1. Make sure your unit has acquired your position, then press

MENU|MENU, highlight SYSTEM SETUP and ENT.

2. Highlight SET LOCAL TIME and press ENT.

3. Select MONTH and ENT. Use ↑ ↓ to select the desired month and press

ENT.

To set the Day:

1. Make sure your unit has acquired your position, then press

MENU|MENU, highlight SYSTEM SETUP and ENT.

2. Highlight SET LOCAL TIME and press ENT.

3. Highlight DAY and press ENT. Use ↑ ↓ to select the desired day and

press ENT.

177

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To set the Year:

1. Make sure your unit has acquired your position, then press

MENU|MENU, highlight SYSTEM SETUP and ENT.

2. Highlight SET LOCAL TIME and press ENT.

3. Select YEAR and press ENT. Use ↑ ↓ to select the year and press ENT.

To select Time Format:

1. Make sure your unit has acquired your position, then press

MENU|MENU, highlight SYSTEM SETUP and ENT.

2. Highlight SET LOCAL TIME and press ENT.

3. Select the desired format, 12 Hour or 24 Hour, and press ENT.

To select a Date Format:

1. Make sure your unit has acquired your position, then press

MENU|MENU, highlight SYSTEM SETUP and ENT.

2. Highlight SET LOCAL TIME and press ENT.

3. Select the desired Date Format, Month/Day/Year, Day/Month/Year

or Year/Month/Day and press ENT.

To Configure DST:

Configure DST allows your unit to automatically adjust to Daylight

Saving Time. Select the country with DST rules that match your region

or simply accept the default.

1. Make sure your unit has acquired your position, then press

MENU|MENU, highlight SYSTEM SETUP and ENT.

2. Select SET LOCAL TIME and press ENT.

3. Highlight the CONFIGURE DST button and press ENT. From the Country

menu, select the country with DST rules that match your region.

4. Press EXIT repeatedly to return to the map display.

Show WAAS Alarm

When the signal is available, your unit will automatically use WAAS to

boost the accuracy of the position fix. When the WAAS signal is lost or

acquired, an alarm message appears. Since the U.S. government is still

developing the WAAS system, its not unusual for a GPS/WAAS re-

ceiver to frequently lose and reacquire its lock on a WAAS satellite.

That can result in the alarm repeatedly going on and off. You have the

option of turning off the WAAS Acquired/Lost alarm without affecting

how the unit uses WAAS.

178

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To turn on/off the WAAS Alarm:

1. Press MENU|MENU|↓ to GPS SETUP|ENT|↓ to SHOW WAAS ALARM.

2. With the option highlighted, press ENT to check it (turn on) or un-

check it (turn off) the WAAS Alarm.

3. Press EXIT|EXIT to return to the map display.

To Require WAAS:

1. Press MENU|MENU|↓ to GPS SETUP|ENT|↓ to REQUIRE WAAS.

2. With the option highlighted, press ENT to check it (turn on) or un-

check it (turn off).

3. Press EXIT|EXIT to return to the map display.

Software Version Information

From time to time, Lowrance updates the operating system software in

some of its products. These software upgrades are usually offered to

customers as free downloads from our web site, www.lowrance.com.

These upgrades make the unit perform better and/or introduce a new

feature or function. You can find out what software version is running

in your unit by using the Software Information command.

The Software Information screen.

To access Software Information:

1. Press MENU|MENU, highlight SYSTEM SETUP and press ENT.

2. Select SOFTWARE INFO and press ENT. Software information will be dis-

played on the screen.

3. Press EXIT repeatedly to return to the map display.

179

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Sounds and Alarm Sound Styles

Sounds triggered by key strokes and alarms can be turned off or ad-

justed to a desired level.

The Sounds menu.

To set Key Press Sounds:

1. Press MENU|MENU, select SOUNDS and press ENT.

2. Highlight KEY PRESS SOUNDS and press ENT to check it (turn on) or un-

check it (turn off.

3. Press EXIT|EXIT to return to the map display.

To set Alarm Sounds:

1. Press MENU|MENU, select SOUNDS and press ENT.

2. Highlight ALARM SOUNDS and press ENT to check it (turn on) or uncheck

it (turn off).

3. Press EXIT|EXIT to return to map page display.

To set Volume:

1. Press MENU|MENU, select SOUNDS and press ENT.

2. Highlight VOLUME and use ← → to move the Volume control bar. The

left end of the scale is low volume. The right end of the scale is high vol-

ume.

3. Press EXIT|EXIT to return to map display.

To set Alarm Style:

1. Press MENU|MENU, select SOUNDS and press ENT.

2. Highlight ALARM STYLE and press ENT.

3. Use ↑ ↓ to select the desired style and press ENT.

4. Press EXIT|EXIT to return to the map display.

180

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Track Smoothing

This is a factory setting on the GPS Setup menu that should always be

left on. When stopped or traveling at slow speeds (such as walking or

trolling), Track Smoothing prevents wandering of trails, the steering

arrow, compass rose and a map in track-up mode.

Track Smoothing highlighted on the GPS Setup menu.

Trail Options

There are several options you can use with trails. Some affect all trails,

other options can be applied to a particular trail. You can change the

way trails are updated, display or hide trails, create a new trail, delete

a trail and edit a trail's name, color, pattern and visibility.

The Trails Menu.

181

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To create a New Trail:

1. Press MENU|MENU, highlight MY TRAILS and press ENT.

2. Highlight NEW TRAIL and press ENT. The Edit Trail menu will appear,

allowing you to Edit the trails name, color, pattern, maximum points,

trail status (active or inactive) and trail visibility. You can also navi-

gate the trail or delete the trail.

New Trail selected on the Trails menu (left). Edit Trails menu (right).

To Delete all Trails

1. Press MENU|MENU, select MY TRAILS and press ENT.

2. Highlight DELETE ALL and press ENT. The following Warning will ap-

pear: Delete All Trails?

3. Select YES and press ENT. You will be returned to the Trails screen,

where all trails have been deleted.

4. Press EXIT repeatedly to return to the map display.

Update Trail Option

The Update Trail menu allows you to change the way trail updates oc-

cur. There are three options: Auto, Time and Distance.

In automatic mode, the unit does not update the plot trail while you are

traveling in a straight line. When you deviate from a straight line, the

unit places a plot point onto the trail. This conserves plot trail points. If

a plot trail uses all of the available points allotted to it, the beginning

points are deleted and replaced by points at the end of the trail.

Selecting Time as the method for updating a trail will automatically

place trail points at a duration of your choosing. You can set the unit to

place trail points placed at any duration between 1 second to 9999 sec-

onds. The default setting is 3 seconds. Updating a trail by Distance will

place trail points when you move a distance of your choosing.

182

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

You can have trail points placed at any distance between 0.01

mile/nm/km to 9.99 mile/nm/km. The default setting is 0.10 mi.

WARNING:

If you uncheck the Update Trail option, automatic trail

creation and recording will be turned off. You must turn

it back on to record trails. The default setting is on.

To select a Trail Update Option:

1. Press MENU|MENU, select MY TRAILS and press ENT.

2. Highlight the TRAIL OPTIONS button and press ENT. The Trail Options

menu will appear with three update criteria: Auto, Time and Distance.

NOTE:

The Update Active Trail checkbox should be checked (turned on). If

it is unchecked (turned off), your trails will not be updated. To turn

it on, highlight UPDATE ACTIVE TRAIL and press ENT.

3. Highlight the desired method for updating trails and press ENT. If

you choose Time or Distance as your update criteria, you can input the

desired update rate (Time) or desired Update Distance (Distance) in

the dialog box that appears at the bottom of the menu.

4. To input your Update Rate or Update Distance, highlight Update

Rate or Update Distance and press ENT. Use ↑ ↓ , ← → to input the

desired setting and press ENT.

5. Press EXIT repeatedly to return to the map display.

Time set as the update criteria (left). Notice the Update Rate dialog

box at the bottom of the menu. Distance is set as the update criteria

(right). The Update Distance dialog is at the bottom of the menu.

183

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To delete a Trail:

1. Press MENU|MENU, select MY TRAILS and press ENT.

2. Select the desired trail from the Saved Trails list and press ENT. The

Edit Trail menu will appear.

3. Highlight DELETE TRAIL and press ENT. The following message will ap-

pear: Delete this trail? Select YES and press ENT.

4. Press EXIT repeatedly to return to the map display.

Edit Trail menu.

Trail Visible/Invisible and Other Trail Options

The name, maximum number of points in the trail, activity, and visibil-

ity are all changed on the Edit Trail menu screen. The Active setting

determines whether or not the unit is recording new points for a par-

ticular trail.

On the Edit Trail menu, press ↓ ↑ to highlight the section you wish to

change, then press ENT. Make your changes, then press EXIT to close

the menu. Related trail functions are discussed in further detail under

the Trails topic in Sec. 7, Advanced GPS Operations.

Transparency

Use the transparency menu to adjust the transparency of menu win-

dows. A high transparency allows you to continue monitoring the

screen's display while adjusting feature settings, though the text of the

menus may fade until it is unreadable. A low transparency will usually

make menu text easier to read, at the cost of watching your display.

Experiment with this feature until you find the right level of transpar-

ency for your eyes.

184

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Transparency selected on main menu.

To adjust Transparency level:

1. Press MENU|MENU|↓ to TRANSPARENCY|ENT. The TRANSPARENCY slider

bar appears.

2. Use ↑ ↓ to move the bar. Move the bar to the bottom of the scale to

eliminate transparency. Moving the bar to the top of the scale will pro-

vide the greatest level of transparency.

3. Press EXIT to return to the map display.

Units of Measure

This menu sets the speed and distance (statute or nautical miles, me-

ters), depth (feet, fathoms, or meters), temperature (degrees Fahren-

heit or Celsius) and heading (true or magnetic) units.

To change Units of Measure:

To set Speed/Distance:

1. Press MENU|MENU, select System Setup and press ENT. UNITS OF MEAS-

^UREwill be highlighted, so press ENT.

2. Speed/Distance will be highlighted. Press ENT.

3. Use ↑ ↓ to select one of the following options: Statute, Nautical or

Metric. Press ENT.

4. Press EXIT repeatedly to return to the sonar display.

185

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Units of Measure Menu.

To set Temperature units:

1. Press MENU|MENU, select System Setup and press ENT. UNITS OF MEAS-

URE will be highlighted, so press ENT.

2. Highlight TEMPERATURE and press ENT.

3. Use ↑ ↓ to select one of the following options: Fahrenheit, Celsius or

Kelvin. Press ENT.

4. Press EXIT repeatedly to return to the sonar display.

To set Pressure units:

1. Press MENU|MENU, select System Setup and press ENT. UNITS OF MEAS-

URE will be highlighted, so press ENT.

2. Highlight PRESSURE and press ENT.

3. Use ↑ ↓ to select one of the following options: Millibars, Bars, PSI,

Hectopascals or Kilopascals. Press ENT.

4. Press EXIT repeatedly to return to the sonar display.

To set Depth units:

1. Press MENU|MENU, select System Setup and press ENT. UNITS OF MEAS-

^UREwill be highlighted, so press ENT.

2. Highlight DEPTH and press ENT.

3. Use ↑ ↓ to select one of the following options: Feet, Fathoms or Me-

ters. Press ENT.

4. Press EXIT repeatedly to return to the sonar display.

To set Volume units:

1. Press MENU|MENU, select System Setup and press ENT. UNITS OF MEAS-

URE will be highlighted, so press ENT.

186

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2. Highlight VOLUME and press ENT.

3. Use ↑ ↓ to select one of the following options: Gallons or Liters. Press

ENT.

4. Press EXIT repeatedly to return to the sonar display.

To set Heading units:

1. Press MENU|MENU, select System Setup and press ENT. UNITS OF MEAS-

URE will be highlighted, so press ENT.

2. Highlight HEADING and press ENT.

3. Use ↑ ↓ to select one of the following options: True or Magnetic.

Press ENT.

4. Press EXIT repeatedly to return to the sonar display.

The Units of Measure Menu.

To set Speed/Distance Unit of Measure: Press ↑ or ↓ to change the

Speed/Distance, then press ENT. After the option is set, press

EXIT|EXIT|EXIT to return to the page display.

To set Heading: Press ↑ or ↓ to change the heading type, then press

ENT. After the option is set, press EXIT|EXIT|EXIT to return to the page

display.

187

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Notes

188

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Section 9: Searching

NOTE:

The background map loaded in your unit lets you to search for U.S.

Interstate Highway exits and exit services, as well as some land

features, including cities and lakes. For a full set of searchable land

features, including landmarks, streets and Points of Interest, you

must load your own high-detail custom map produced with our

MapCreate 6 software. For a complete description of what detail is

found in the background map and custom MapCreate maps, see

page 108. (Remember, our pre-made FreedomMaps contain all the

same detail found in custom-made MapCreate maps.)

This unit's varied search functions all begin with either the Find Way-

point menu or the Map Page menu. Press WPT and the Find Waypoint

menu appears for waypoints and Points of Interest (POI). From the

Map Page, press MENU and the Map Page menu appears for streets and

highway exits.

Find Waypoint menu (left). Map Page menu (right).

NOTE:

You can search for items after the unit has acquired a position, or

while using the unit in simulator mode. Distance and bearing to

the selected item will be calculated from the unit's current position,

or the last known position if operating in simulator mode or with-

out a position determined). You can look up items by name or

search for items nearest to you.

189

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Find Streets

1. From a Map Page, press MENU|↓ to FIND STREETS|ENT.

2. Press ENT to search in the Street field.

3. To enter a street name, press ↓ to STREET|ENT. There are two options:

A. You can spell out the name in the top selection box. Press ↑ or ↓ to

change the first letter, then press → to move the cursor to the next let-

ter and repeat until the name is correct, then press ENT|ENT.

B. Jump down to the lower selection list by pressing ENT, then press ↓

or ↑ to select a street name from the list, then press ENT. The street

name you selected is now in the street field.

Finds Streets menu (left). Find Street by Name menu (right).

4. To enter a city name, press ↓ to CITY|ENT. You will be asked if you

want to find streets only within a particular city. This option is de-

signed so you can limit an address search to a single city if necessary

(see the following note).

If you select yes, there are two options: A. You can spell out the city name

in the top selection box. Press ↑ or ↓ to change the first letter, then press

→ to move the cursor to the next letter and repeat until the name is cor-

rect, then press ENT|ENT. B. Jump down to the lower selection list by

pressing ENT, then press ↓ or ↑ to select a city name from the list, then

press ENT. The city name you selected is now in the city field.

NOTE:

We recommend that you do not enter a city name unless the list

you are given is too large when searching without it. This unit can

actually search quicker when you don’t enter a city.

190

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Find By Name menu with list of cities.

Find Any Item Selected by Map Cursor

With a POI or map feature selected by the cursor, press WPT. To return

to the previous page, press EXIT.

A POI selected by the cursor (left). POI information screen (right).

NOTE:

Since the Go To Waypoint command is highlighted, you can navi-

gate to the selected POI by pressing ENT|EXIT while in the POI

Waypoint Information screen.

Find Interstate Highway Exits

1. From the Map Page, press MENU|↓ to HIGHWAY EXITS|ENT, which calls

up the Find Exit menu.

191

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The Find Exit menu.

2. First, select a highway name by pressing ENT, which calls up the

Find By Name menu. There are two highway search options: A. You

can spell out the highway name in the top selection box. Press ↑ or ↓ to

change the first letter, then press → to move the cursor to the next let-

ter and repeat until the name is correct, then press ENT|ENT. B. Jump

down to the lower selection list by pressing ENT, then press ↓ or ↑ to

select a highway from the list, then press ENT.

Find By Name menu.

3. Once you have selected a highway name you can then select an exit.

Press ↓ to switch to the Exit List, then press ↓ or ↑ until you highlight

the exit, then press ENT.

192

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Find Exit menu with an exit selected in the Exit List.

4. In the Exit Information screen you have two choices. A. Press ENT to

navigate or "go to" the exit. B. Press →|ENT to find the exit on the

map.

Go To Exit highlighted (left). Find On Map selected (right).

Tip:

You can also look up some additional information on the Exit Ser-

vices located near this exit. Press ↓ to SERVICES|press ↓ ↑ to select

Service Name|ENT.

193

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Exit Information screen (left). General location

and amenities information (right).

Find Map Places or Points of Interest (POI)

1. Press WPT, press ↓ or ↑ to select a map place or POI category, then

press ENT. (To narrow your search, press → then press ↓ or ↑ to select a

subcategory before pressing ENT.) You will be given two options; Search

By Name or By Nearest.

Find Waypoint menu with Lodging POI category selected (left) and

with the RV Parks subcategory selected (right).

2. To search by the nearest POI: press ↓|ENT. The find by nearest

menu will show a calculating screen, then a list of the nearest POI's

will appear. Press ↓ ↑ to the selected POI and press ENT to call up the

POI's Waypoint Information screen.

194

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Find by Nearest option, left, Calculating screen, center, POI list, right.

3. To search by the name of a POI: press ENT. There are two options: A.

You can spell out the POI in the top selection box. Press ↑ or ↓ to

change the first letter, then press → to move the cursor to the next let-

ter and repeat until the name is correct, then press ENT|ENT. B. Jump

down to the lower selection list by pressing ENT, then press ↓ or ↑ to

select a POI from the list, then press ENT to call up the POI's Waypoint

Information screen.

Find by Name option, left, Find by Name menu, right.

4. When the POI's Waypoint Information screen is displayed, you can

choose to Go To the POI waypoint by pressing ENT or find it on the map

by pressing→|ENT.

195

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Go To Waypoint highlighted (left). Find on Map selected (right).

Find Streets or Intersections

Find a Street

1. From the Map Page, press MENU|↓ to FIND STREETS|ENT and the Find

Streets Menu appears.

2. You must first fill in a street name in the First Street dialog box.

Press ENT to display the Find By Name menu. There are two options:

A. You can spell out the street in the top selection box. Press ↑ or ↓ to

change the first letter, then press → to move the cursor to the next let-

ter and repeat until the name is correct, then press ENT|ENT. B. Or you

can jump down to the lower box and pick a street from the list. Press

ENT, then press ↓ or ↑ to select a street from the list and press ENT.

Find Streets menu (left). When finding a street by name (right), spell

out the name in the top box or select it from the list in the lower box.

3. The Find Streets menu reappears with the street you're searching

for in the First Street box. (In this example, it's 80th Street.) To search

196

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

for that street, press ↓ to FIND FIRST STREET|ENT. A message appears ask-

ing you to wait while the unit finds the street. When the Streets Found

list appears, press ↑ or ↓ to select the street you are searching for and

press ENT.

Find Streets menu with the Find First street highlighted (left). Streets

Found list (right).

4. The Map Page appears, with the cursor pointing to the found street.

If you want to navigate to the found street at the cursor location, just

press MENU|ENT|EXIT.

Map Page showing results of a street search.

The cursor points to the located street.

Find an Intersection

You must enter one street in the First Street dialog box and enter the

next street in the Second Street dialog box.

1. From the Map Page, press MENU|↓ to FIND STREETS|ENT and the Find

Streets Menu appears.

197

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2. You must fill in a street name in the First Street dialog box. Press ENT

to display the Find By Name menu. There are two options: A. You can

spell out the street in the top selection box. Press ↑ or ↓ to change the

first letter, then press → to move the cursor to the next letter and repeat

until the name is correct, then press ENT|ENT. B. Or you can jump down

to the lower box and pick a street from the list. Press ENT, then press ↓ or

↑ to select a street from the list and press ENT.

3. The Find Streets menu reappears with the street you're searching

for in the First Street box. (In this example, it's 80th Street.)

4. Now fill in the second street. Press ↓ to SECOND STREET|ENT and the

Find By Name menu appears again. Just like before, there are two op-

tions: A. You can spell out the second street in the top selection box.

Press ↑ or ↓ to change the first letter, then press → to move the cursor

to the next letter and repeat until the name is correct, then press

ENT|ENT. B. You can also jump down to the lower box and pick the sec-

ond street from the selection list. Press ENT, then press ↓ or ↑ to select

a street from the list and press ENT.

5. The Find Streets menu reappears with the first and second street

dialog boxes filled in. In this example, we selected 71st Avenue as our

second street. You could now use similar techniques to select a city or

Zip code, but your search will probably be faster if you leave those

boxes blank. (You can specify a city and/or zip code when the search

result list is too long.)

Find Intersection command highlighted (left). Intersections Found list

(right).

6. To search for the intersection of the two streets, press ↓|→ to FIND

INTERSECTION|ENT. A message appears asking you to wait while the unit

finds the intersection. When the Intersections Found list appears, press

198

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

↑ or ↓ to select the intersection you are searching for and press ENT. (In

our example, we selected the intersection of SW 80th Street and SW

71st Avenue in Miami, Fla.)

7. The Map Page appears, with the cursor pointing to the found intersec-

tion. The intersection in our example is shown in the following figure.

Map Page showing results of an intersection search.

The cursor points to the located intersection.

If you want to navigate to the found intersection, just press

MENU|ENT|EXIT.

Find Waypoints

1. Press WPT|ENT.

2. If searching for the waypoint By Name, press ENT. If searching for

the Nearest waypoint, press ↓ to NEAREST|ENT. (To search by name,

jump to step 5.)

Find By Nearest command (left). Find by Name command (right).

199

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3. If you're looking for nearest, the unit says it is calculating, then a list

of waypoints appears. The closest waypoint is highlighted at the top of

the list. The waypoint furthest from you is at the bottom of the list.

4. To see location information on the closest (highlighted) waypoint,

press ENT and the Waypoint screen appears. (If you wanted to, you

could select another waypoint from the list with the ↑ or ↓ keys.)

A. To navigate to the waypoint, press ENT. (The Go To Waypoint

command is already highlighted.) The unit will show navigation in-

formation to the waypoint.

B. To find the waypoint, press ↓ to FIND ON MAP|ENT. The Map Page

appears with the cursor highlighting the found waypoint.

Waypoint Information screens with Go To Waypoint selected (left) and

Find on Map selected (right).

To return to the previous page, press EXIT repeatedly.

5. If you're looking by name, there are two options: A. You can spell out

the name in the top selection box. Press ↑ or ↓ to change the first letter,

then press → to move the cursor to the next letter and repeat until the

name is correct, then press ENT|ENT. B. Or you can jump down to the

lower selection list by pressing ENT, then press ↓ or ↑ to select a way-

point from the list, then press ENT. The waypoint screen appears.

200

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Find By Name menu (left). Waypoint Information screen (center). The

found waypoint is highlighted by the cursor on the Map Page (right).

A. To navigate to the waypoint, press ENT. (Go To Waypoint com-

mand is already highlighted.) The unit will show navigation infor-

mation to the waypoint.

B. To find the waypoint, press ↓ to FIND ON MAP|ENT. The Map Page

appears with the cursor highlighting the found waypoint.

201

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Notes

202

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Section 10: NMEA 2000

NMEA 2000 Menu

The NMEA 2000 menu on your display unit's main menu allows you to

configure, calibrate and monitor devices on a NMEA 2000 network. The

NMEA 2000 menu provides access to the Bus Setup, Fuel Management

and NMEA 2000 Alarms. You also can turn on/off Waypoint Sharing

and Backlight Synchronization from the NMEA 2000 menu.

NOTE:

Your internal GPS receiver is a non-network device, so data from

the receiver CAN NOT be transmitted across a NMEA 2000 net-

work.

Internal GPS Receiver

GPS data from your internal GPS receiver can not be transmitted across

the network to other network devices. The only way to transmit GPS data

across the network is to add a LGC-2000 or LGC-3000 module to the

LowranceNET.

To switch from internal GPS to LGC module

Press MENU, select NMEA 2000 and press ENT. Choose BUSS SETUP and

press ENT.

LGC-2000 highlighted on Buss Setup menu (left). LGC-2000 Device

Configuration menu with the Set Active checkbox selected (center).

LGC-2000 is now listed as Active on the Buss Setup menu (right).

1. From the Buss Configuration list, select the LGC module and press

ENT.

2. Press ↓ to Set Active and press ENT. The LGC module is now the ac-

tive antenna for your unit. The Internal GPS antenna was automati-

cally disabled when the LGC module was set to active.

203

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

NOTE:

To switch back to the internal GPS antenna, repeat the steps

above. The internal GPS will be automatically enabled when you

turn off (uncheck) the LGC module Set Active box.

Bus Setup

Selecting Bus Setup from the NMEA 2000 menu gives you access to the

Bus Configuration menu and the NMEA Diagnostics and Ethernet Di-

agnostics pages. The Bus Configuration menu allows you to choose an

engine-tank configuration and manage devices on the network. When

the Bus Configuration menu is accessed, a list will appear of all NMEA

2000 devices on the network.

Bus Setup highlighted on the NMEA 2000 menu.

Bus Configuration menu (left). NMEA Diagnostics page (center).

Ethernet Diagnostics (right)

The NMEA Diagnostics page displays information about the perform-

ance of the network bus, keeping you updated on bus status, mode, er-

rors and bus traffic.

The Ethernet Diagnostics page keeps you updated on the performance

of an Ethernet connection (if applicable) supplying information ranging

204

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

from IP Address to upload and download rates (bytes per second). To

refresh either Diagnostics page, highlight the PING ALL DEVICES button at

the bottom of the page and press ENT.

The network devices list is located in the top half of the Bus Configura-

tion menu. You can configure, calibrate and set alarms for devices ac-

cessed from the Bus Configuration menu network devices list.

The Engine-Tank Configuration and Tank Select menus as well as the

Tank Size dialog box are located on the bottom half of the Bus Configu-

ration menu. The Set Configuration button — positioned next to the

engine-tank configuration menu — allows you to finalize a selected con-

figuration.

NOTE:

If you have not used the LMF-200 or LMF-400 to choose an engine-

tank configuration for your vessel, you must use your display unit

to select a configuration.

Bus Configuration menu with list of network devices. Engine-Tank

Configuration and Tank Select menus are at the bottom of the screen.

Engine & Tank Configuration

The Engine-Tank configuration menu is located below the NMEA 2000

Devices list, but will only be accessible if a Suzuki engine Interface,

EP-10 Fuel Flow, EP-15 Fluid Level, EP-45 Pressure Sensor or EP-50

Storage Device are on the network. When choosing an engine-tank con-

figuration you will use the Tank Select menu, Tank Size dialog box and

Set configuration button, all detailed below.

205

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Tank Select

The Tank Select menu allows you to choose from up to three tanks

(Port, Center and Starboard), depending on the Engine-tank configura-

tion that has been selected. This allows you to set up each tank indi-

vidually.

Tank Size

The Tank Size menu allows you to input the size of a selected tank in

gallons. After selecting the desired tank from the Tank Select menu,

you are ready to enter the tank's size.

Set Configuration button

The Set Configuration button is used to finalize engine-tank configura-

tion settings.

Setting Engine-Tank Configuration:

1. Press MENU| MENU, use ↓ ↑ to highlight NMEA 2000 and press ENT.

2. The NMEA 2000 menu will appear with five options: Bus Setup,

Fuel Management, NMEA 2000 Alarms, Waypoint Sharing and Back-

light Synchronization. Choose BUS SETUP and press ENT.

3. Select ENGINE & TANK CONFIG and press ENT, which will open the Engine

& Tank Configuration menu with the following configuration options: 1

Engine/1 Tank, 1 Engine/2 Tanks, 2 Engines/1 Tank, 2 Engines/2

Tanks, 3 Engines/1 Tank, 3 Engine/3 Tanks and Unconfigured Bus.

1 Engine/1Tank highlighted on Engine and Tank Configuration

menu (left). Starboard highlighted on Tank Select menu (center).

Tank Size set to 40 gallons (right).

4. Choose the configuration that matches the number of engines and

tanks on your vessel and press ENT.

5. Highlight TANK SELECT and press ENT, which will open the Tank Select

menu.

6. Select the tank you want to set up and press ENT. Press → to high-

light the Tank Size dialog box and press ENT.

206

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

7. Use ↓ ↑, ← → to input the capacity (gallons) of the tank you chose

from the Tank Select menu and press ENT.

8. Repeat Steps 5-7 for each remaining tank.

9. When all tanks have been configured, press the SET CONFIGURATION but-

ton. The following confirmation message will appear: Are you sure you

wish to change the bus configuration? Choose YES and press ENT, Press

EXIT to get back to the main display.

Device Configuration Menu

When a device is selected from the network devices list on the Bus Con-

figuration menu, its Device Configuration menu will appear. Device

configuration menus vary among devices. Available functions on device

configuration menus allow you to change device names, tank sizes,

fluid types and provide access to the Advanced Options menu. We will

cover configuration and calibration later in this section.

Device Information and Device Data

The Device information panel, located to the left of the Device Configu-

ration menu, displays information on the selected device that includes,

software version, model, address, serial number, instance and current

status.

If you do not have an EP-15 Fluid Level, EP-10 Fuel Flow or EP-20 En-

gine Interface on the network, the Bus Configuration menu will not

display the Engine-Tank Configuration menu, Tank Select menu, Tank

Size menu or Set Configuration button.

Device Data is shown in the Device Data window at the bottom of the

device configuration menu. The information displayed in the Device

Data window will vary among devices. If, for example, you are viewing

the device configuration menu for an EP-15 Fluid Level, the device

data window will include tank size and the amount of fuel left in the

tank.

207

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The Device Data for an EP-10 Fuel Flow includes Fuel Rate (amount of

fuel burned per hour), Fuel Used, Trip Fuel Used and Seasonal Fuel

Used.

NOTE:

If, as in the graphic above, you do not have a Suzuki Engine Inter-

face, EP-15 Fluid Level or EP-10 Fuel Flow on the network, the

Engine & Configuration menu, Tank Select menu, Tank Size dialog

and Set Configuration button will not be displayed on the Bus Con-

figuration menu.

Fuel Management Menu

The Fuel Management menu gives you access to the following options:

Tank Location, Fuel Added, Add Fuel, Fill Tank, Engine Select, Reset

Calibration, Reset Trip and Reset Seasonal. Those options allow you to

configure, calibrate, reset calibration, reset trip fuel and reset seasonal

fuel for select NMEA 2000 devices. We will cover configuration and cali-

bration procedures later in this section.

Fuel Management highlighted on the NMEA 2000 menu (left).

Fuel Management menu (right).

Tank Location

If you chose an engine-tank configuration with more than one tank, you

will be able to switch the tank location (configuration) in the Tank Lo-

cation menu. When fuel is added to a tank, you will select the correct

tank from the Tank Location menu, then input the amount of fuel

added in the Fuel Added dialog box.

Fuel Added

Used in tandem with the Add Fuel command, the Fuel Added dialog

box allows you to input the amount of fuel added to the tank, when an

amount of fuel is added that does not fill up the tank.

208

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Add Fuel

After entering the amount of fuel added to a tank in the Fuel Added

dialog, the Add Fuel command finalizes the entry of the data. Like the

Fuel Added dialog, the Add Fuel command will only be used when an

amount of fuel is added that does not fill up the tank.

Fill Tank

You will use the Fill Tank command when calibrating a fuel flow and

when filling up the tank without calibration.

Adding Fuel to Tank

Tank Location, Fuel Added and Add Fuel commands work together to

keep NMEA 2000 fuel data consistent with the actual amount of fuel

added to the fuel tank(s).

1. Press MENU|MENU, select NMEA 2000 and press ENT.

2. The NMEA 2000 menu will appear with five options: Bus Setup,

Fuel Management, NMEA 2000 Alarms, Waypoint Sharing and Back-

light Synchronization. Select FUEL MANAGEMENT and press ENT.

3. Highlight TANK LOCATION and press ENT. The Tank Location menu will

appear with up to three options: Port, Center and Starboard.

4. Select the tank you added fuel to and press ENT.

5. Follow the steps below that apply to your tank.

If you filled up the tank:

A. Press the FILL TANK button and press ENT. The following message will

appear: Are you sure you wish to Fill Tank? Press ENT. Another mes-

sage will appear: Do you wish to re-calibrate the device? Highlight NO

and press ENT.

If you did not fill up the tank:

B. Highlight FUEL ADDED and press ENT to access the FUEL ADDED dialog

box. Use ↑ ↓ , ← → to input the amount of fuel added to the tank and

press ENT. Select the ADD FUEL button and press ENT. The following mes-

sage will appear: Are you sure you wish to Add Fuel? Highlight YES and

press ENT.

6. Press EXIT repeatedly to get back to the main display.

Engine Operations

The lower half of the Fuel Management menu contains the following

Engine Operation functions: Engine Select, Reset Calibration, Reset

Trip and Reset Seasonal.

Engine Select

Engine Select allows you to choose the desired engine when resetting

calibration, resetting trip fuel and resetting seasonal fuel.

209

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To Reset Calibration:

Choosing the Reset Calibration command will switch fuel flow calibra-

tion settings back to factory defaults.

1. Press MENU|MENU, select NMEA 2000 and press ENT.

2. Highlight FUEL MANAGEMENT and press ENT. The Fuel Management

menu will appear.

3. Highlight to ENGINE SELECT and press ENT. Select the desired engine —

the engine attached to the desired fuel flow — and press ENT.

4. Highlight RESET CALIBRATION and press ENT. The following confirma-

tion message will appear: Are you sure you wish to Reset Calibration?

Select YES and press ENT. Calibration settings for the selected fuel have

been returned to factory defaults.

To Reset Trip:

The Reset Trip function allows you to reset to zero the running total of

fuel used on a particular trip.

1. Press MENU|MENU, select NMEA 2000 and press ENT.

2. Highlight FUEL MANAGEMENT and press ENT. The Fuel Management

menu will appear.

3. Select RESET TRIP and press ENT. The following confirmation message

will appear: Are you sure you wish to Reset Trip? Highlight YES and

press ENT. The Trip Fuel Used figure has been reset to zero.

To Reset Seasonal:

Your unit can track fuel usage not only for trips, but also for entire sea-

sons. The reset seasonal command allows you to reset to zero the run-

ning total of fuel used during a season.

1. 1. Press MENU|MENU, select NMEA 2000 and press ENT.

2. Highlight FUEL MANAGEMENT and press ENT. The Fuel Management

menu will appear.

3. Select RESET SEASONAL and press ENT. The following confirmation mes-

sage will appear: Are you sure you wish to Reset Seasonal?

Highlight YES and press ENT. The Seasonal Fuel Used figure has been

reset to zero.

NMEA 2000 Alarms

The NMEA 2000 Alarms menu allows you to set Full and Empty fuel

alarms for the EP-10 Fuel Flow, EP-15 Fluid Level, EP-50 Storage De-

vice and the Suzuki Engine Interface. The alarms may be set to a per-

centage (0-100%) of tank capacity.

210

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The second tab at the top of the NMEA 2000 Alarms page is the Alarm

Status Tab. When an alarm has been set for a device, the alarm and its

current status will be shown on the Alarm Status window. To view the

Alarm Status window, highlight the Alarm Status tab and press ENT.

To set NMEA 2000 Alarm:

1. Press MENU|MENU, select NMEA 2000 and press ENT.

2. Highlight NMEA 2000 ALARMS and press ENT.

3. Highlight FLUID LEVEL DEVICE and press ENT. Use ↑ ↓ to select the de-

vice you want to set an alarm for and press ENT.

4. Highlight the ENABLED box next to the desired alarm (Full Alarm or

Empty Alarm) and press ENT to turn on the alarm.

5. To set the alarm percentage, press → to highlight PERCENT and press

ENT.

6. Use ↑ ↓, ← → to input the desired percentage and press ENT. Repeat

Steps 3-4 to set the other alarm.

7. Highlight SET CONFIGURATION and press ENT to finalize alarm settings.

Press EXIT repeatedly to get back to the main display.

NOTE:

To turn off (uncheck) an alarm, highlight its ENABLED BOX and press

ENTER.

Waypoint Sharing

Waypoint Sharing allows you to share a waypoint from one display unit

with display units across the network.

To turn on/off Waypoint Sharing:

1. Press MENU|MENU, select NMEA 2000 and press ENT.

2. Highlight WAYPOINT SHARING and press ENT which will turn on/off way-

point sharing.

3. Press EXIT repeatedly to get return to the main display.

Backlight Synchronization

The Backlight Synchronization command will keep all display unit

backlight levels consistent across the NMEA 2000 network. So, if you

set the backlight level to 75% on one display unit, all other units on the

network will automatically switch to the same setting.

211

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To turn on/off Backlight Synchronization:

1. Press MENU|MENU, select NMEA 2000 and press ENT.

2. Highlight BACKLIGHT SYNCHRONIZATION and press ENT, which will turn

on/off Backlight Synchronization.

3. Press EXIT repeatedly to get back to the main display.

Configuring EP Sensors

All configurable devices are configured through their Device Configura-

tion menus, which may be accessed through the network devices list on

the Bus Configuration menu.

EP-35 Temperature Configuration

To input Device Name:

1. Press MENU|MENU, use ↑ ↓ to select NMEA 2000 and press ENT. The

NMEA 2000 menu will appear with five options: Bus Setup, Fuel Man-

agement, NMEA 2000 Alarms, Waypoint Sharing and Backlight Syn-

chronization.

2. Highlight BUS SETUP and press ENT, which will open the Bus Configu-

ration menu. A list of network devices will be at the top of the page.

3. Select the temp sensor you want to rename and press ENT. The De-

vice Configuration menu will appear with the Device Name dialog box

highlighted.

4. Press ENT and use ↑ ↓, ← → to input the desired name for the temp

sensor. Press ENT. Press EXIT repeatedly to get back to the main dis-

play.

To select Temp Type:

1. Press MENU|MENU, use ↑ ↓ to select NMEA 2000 and press ENT. The

NMEA 2000 menu will appear with five options: Bus Setup, Fuel Man-

agement, NMEA 2000 Alarms, Waypoint Sharing and Backlight Syn-

chronization.

2. Highlight BUS SETUP and press ENT, which will open the Bus Configu-

ration menu. A list of network devices will be at the top of the page.

3. Select the desired temp sensor and press ENT. The Device Configura-

tion menu will appear.

4. Highlight TEMP TYPE and press ENT. The following list of Temp Types

will appear: Water, Outside, Inside, Engine Room, Cabin, Live Well,

Bait Well, Refigeration, Heating System and Unknown.

5. Highlight the desired Temp Type and press ENT. The following con-

firmation message will appear: Are you sure you wish to change this

device's configuration?

6. Highlight YES and press ENT. Press EXIT repeatedly to get back to the

main display.

212

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced Options menu

The Temp sensor Advanced Options menu contains two categories: In-

stance and Restore Defaults.

Instance

The Instance command is intended for use only by experienced NMEA

2000 network technicians. Instance allows network technicians to re-

solve certain electronic probe conflicts. This is most likely to occur if the

network includes LMF-200 or LMF-400 digital gauges, which support

the display of fewer electronic probes than your GPS or sonar/GPS unit.

If you want to use your unit in a network including one of these digital

gauges, you may need to consult customer service.

You should never need this command if you are connecting your unit to

a network with similar display units and/or a series of electronic

probes.

Restore Defaults

The Restore Defaults command allows you to reset an individual EP-35

Temp Sensor's settings to factory defaults. If, for example, you execute

the Restore Defaults command from your Water Temp's Advanced Op-

tions menu, only the settings for the Water Temp will be reset to fac-

tory defaults. Other temps on the network will not be affected.

To restore default settings:

1. Press MENU| MENU, use ↑ ↓ to select NMEA 2000 and press ENT. The

NMEA 2000 menu will appear with five options: Bus Setup, Fuel Man-

agement, NMEA 2000 Alarms, Waypoint Sharing and Backlight Syn-

chronization.

2. Highlight BUS SETUP and press ENT, which will open the Bus Configu-

ration menu. A list of network devices will be at the top of the page.

3. Select the desired temp sensor and press ENT. The Device Configura-

tion menu will appear.

4. Highlight ADVANCED OPTIONS and press ENT.

5. Select RESTORE DEFAULTS and press ENT. The following message will

appear: Are you sure you wish to change this device's configuration?

6. Highlight YES and press ENT. Press EXIT repeatedly to get back to the

main display.

EP-10 Fuel Flow Configuration

To input Device Name:

1. Press MENU| MENU, use ↑ ↓ to select NMEA 2000 and press ENT. The

NMEA 2000 menu will appear with five options: Bus Setup, Fuel Man-

agement, NMEA 2000 Alarms, Waypoint Sharing and Backlight Syn-

chronization.

213

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2. Highlight BUS SETUP and press ENT, which will open the Bus Configu-

ration menu. A list of network devices will be at the top of the page.

3. Select the fuel flow you want to rename and press ENT. The Device

Configuration menu will appear with the Device Name dialog box high-

lighted.

4. Press ENTER and use ↑ ↓, ← → to input the desired name for the fuel

flow. Press ENT. Press EXIT repeatedly to get back to the main display.

To select a Location:

1. Press MENU| MENU, use ↑ ↓ to select NMEA 2000 and press ENT. The

NMEA 2000 menu will appear with five options: Bus Setup, Fuel Man-

agement, NMEA 2000 Alarms, Waypoint Sharing and Backlight Syn-

chronization.

2. Highlight BUS SETUP and press ENT, which will open the Bus Configu-

ration menu. A list of network devices will be at the top of the page.

3. Select the desired fuel flow and press ENT. The Device Configuration

menu will appear.

4. Select LOCATION and press ENT, which will open the Location menu

with following options: Port, Center, Starboard and Unknown.

5. Highlight the desired location and press ENT. The following message

will appear: Are you sure you wish to change this device's configuration?

5. Select YES and press ENT. Press EXIT repeatedly to get back to the

main display.

Advanced Options menu

The Fuel Flow sensor Advanced Options menu contains two categories:

Instance and Restore Defaults.

Instance

The Instance command is intended for use only by experienced NMEA

2000 network technicians. Instance allows network technicians to re-

solve certain electronic probe conflicts. This is most likely to occur if the

network includes LMF-200 or LMF-400 digital gauges, which support

the display of fewer electronic probes than your GPS or sonar/GPS unit.

If you want to use your unit in a network including one of these digital

gauges, you may need to consult customer service.

You should never need this command if you are connecting your unit to

a network with similar display units and/or a series of electronic

probes.

Restore Defaults

The Restore Defaults command allows you to reset an individual EP-10

Fuel Flow Sensor's settings to factory defaults. If, for example, you exe-

cute the Restore Defaults command from your Port Fuel Flow Ad-

214

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

vanced Options menu, only the settings for the Port Fuel Flow will be

reset to factory defaults. Other fuel flows on the network will not be

affected.

To restore default settings:

1. Press MENU| MENU, use ↑ ↓ to select NMEA 2000 and press ENT. The

NMEA 2000 menu will appear with five options: Bus Setup, Fuel Man-

agement, NMEA 2000 Alarms, Waypoint Sharing and Backlight Syn-

chronization.

2. Highlight BUS SETUP and press ENT, which will open the Bus Configu-

ration menu. A list of network devices will be at the top of the page.

3. Use ↑ ↓ to select the desired fuel flow and press ENT. The Device

Configuration menu will appear.

4. Highlight ADVANCED OPTIONS and press ENT.

5. Select RESTORE DEFAULTS and press ENT. The following message will

appear: Are you sure you wish to change this device's configuration?

6. Highlight YES and press ENT. Press EXIT repeatedly to get back to the

main display.

EP-15 Fluid Level Configuration

To input Device Name:

1. Press MENU| MENU, use ↑ ↓ to select NMEA 2000 and press ENT. The

NMEA 2000 menu will appear with five options: Bus Setup, Fuel Man-

agement, NMEA 2000 Alarms, Waypoint Sharing and Backlight Syn-

chronization.

2. Highlight BUS SETUP and press ENT, which will open the Bus Configu-

ration menu. A list of network devices will be at the top of the page.

3. Select a fluid level you want to rename and press ENT. The Device

Configuration menu will appear with the Device Name dialog box high-

lighted.

4. Press ENT and use ↑ ↓, ← → to input the desired name for the fluid

level. Press ENTER. Press EXIT repeatedly to get back to the main dis-

play.

To select Tank Instance (Location):

1. Press MENU| MENU, use ↑ ↓ to select NMEA 2000 and press ENT. The

NMEA 2000 menu will appear with five options: Bus Setup, Fuel Man-

agement, NMEA 2000 Alarms, Waypoint Sharing and Backlight Syn-

chronization.

2. Highlight BUS SETUP and press ENT, which will open the Bus Configu-

ration menu. A list of network devices will be at the top of the page.

3. Select the desired fluid level and press ENT. The Device Configura-

tion menu will appear.

215

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4. Highlight TANK INSTANCE and press ENT, which will open the Tank In-

stance menu with the following options: Tank 1, Tank 2, Tank 3 and

Unknown.

5. Select the desired Tank Instance (location) and press ENT. The fol-

lowing confirmation message will appear: Are you sure you wish to

change this device's configuration?

6. Highlight YES and press ENT. Press EXIT repeatedly to get back to the

main display.

To select Fluid Type:

1. Press MENU| MENU, use ↑ ↓ to select NMEA 2000 and press ENT. The

NMEA 2000 menu will appear with five options: Bus Setup, Fuel Man-

agement, NMEA 2000 Alarms, Waypoint Sharing and Backlight Syn-

chronization.

2. Highlight BUS SETUP and press ENT, which will open the Bus Configu-

ration menu. A list of network devices will be at the top of the page.

3. Select the desired fluid level and press ENT. The Fluid Level Device

Configuration menu will appear.

4. Press ↓ to FLUID TYPE and press ENT, which will open the Fluid Type

menu with the following options: Fuel, Water, Gray Water, Live Well,

Oil, Black Water and Unknown.

5. Select the desired fluid type and press ENT. The following message

will appear: Are you sure you wish to change this device's configuration?

6. Highlight YES and press ENT. Press EXIT repeatedly to get back to the

main display.

To input Tank Size:

1. Press MENU| MENU, use ↑ ↓ to select NMEA 2000 and press ENT. The

NMEA 2000 menu will appear with five options: Bus Setup, Fuel Man-

agement, NMEA 2000 Alarms, Waypoint Sharing and Backlight Syn-

chronization.

2. Highlight BUS SETUP and press ENT, which will open the Bus Configu-

ration menu. A list of network devices will be at the top of the page.

3. Select the desired fluid level and press ENT. The Fluid Level Device

Configuration menu will appear.

4. Highlight TANK SIZE and press ENT. Use ↑ ↓ ,← → to input the size of

the tank and press Enter. The following message will appear: Are you

sure you wish to change this device's configuration?

5. Select YES and press ENT. Press EXIT repeatedly to get back to the

main display.

216

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced Options menu

The Fuel Flow sensor Advanced Options menu contains two categories:

Instance and Restore Defaults.

Instance

The Instance command is intended for use only by experienced NMEA

2000 network technicians. Instance allows network technicians to re-

solve certain electronic probe conflicts. This is most likely to occur if the

network includes LMF-200 or LMF-400 digital gauges, which support

the display of fewer electronic probes than your GPS or sonar/GPS unit.

If you want to use your unit in a network including one of these digital

gauges, you may need to consult customer service.

You should never need this command if you are connecting your unit to

a network with similar display units and/or a series of electronic

probes.

Restore Defaults

The Restore Defaults command allows you to reset an individual EP-15

Fluid Level Sensor's settings to factory defaults. If, for example, you

execute the Restore Defaults command from your Gray Water Fluid

Level Advanced Options menu, only the settings for the Gray Water

Fluid Level will be reset to factory defaults. Other fluid levels on the

network will not be affected.

To restore default settings:

1. Press MENU| MENU, use ↑ ↓ to select NMEA 2000 and press ENT. The

NMEA 2000 menu will appear with five options: Bus Setup, Fuel Man-

agement, NMEA 2000 Alarms, Waypoint Sharing and Backlight Syn-

chronization.

2. Highlight BUS SETUP and press ENT, which will open the Bus Configu-

ration menu. A list of network devices will be at the top of the page.

3. Select the desired fluid level and press ENT. The Device Configura-

tion menu will appear.

4. Highlight ADVANCED OPTIONS and press ENT.

5. Select RESTORE DEFAULTS and press ENT. The following message will

appear: Are you sure you wish to change this device's configuration?

6. Highlight YES and press ENT. Press EXIT repeatedly to get back to the

main display.

NOTE:

The Fluid Level Device Configuration menu also contains the Cali-

brate button, but we will address that later in the segment covering

Calibration.

217

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Suzuki Engine Interface Configuration

To input Device Name:

1. Press MENU| MENU, use ↑ ↓ to select NMEA 2000 and press ENT. The

NMEA 2000 menu will appear with five options: Bus Setup, Fuel Man-

agement, NMEA 2000 Alarms, Waypoint Sharing and Backlight Syn-

chronization.

2. Highlight BUS SETUP and press ENT, which will open the Bus Configu-

ration menu. A list of network devices will be at the top of the page.

3. Use ↑ ↓ to select the engine interface you want to rename and press

ENT. The Device Configuration menu will appear with the Device Name

dialog box highlighted.

4. Press ENT and use ↑ ↓, ← → to input a name for the interface. Press

ENT. Press EXIT repeatedly to return to the main display.

To select a Location:

1. Press MENU| MENU, use ↑ ↓ to select NMEA 2000 and press ENT. The

NMEA 2000 menu will appear with five options: Bus Setup, Fuel Man-

agement, NMEA 2000 Alarms, Waypoint Sharing and Backlight Syn-

chronization.

2. Highlight BUS SETUP and press ENT, which will open the Bus Configu-

ration menu. A list of network devices will be at the top of the page.

3. Select the desired engine interface and press ENT. The Device Con-

figuration menu will appear.

4. Highlight LOCATION and press ENT, which will open the Location menu

with the following options: Port, Center, Starboard and Unknown.

5. Select the desired location and press ENT. The following confirmation

message will appear: Are you sure you wish to change this device's con-

figuration?

6. Press ENT. Press EXIT repeatedly to get back to the main display.

To select Engine Type:

1. Press MENU| MENU, use ↑ ↓ to select NMEA 2000 and press ENT. The

NMEA 2000 menu will appear with five options: Bus Setup, Fuel Man-

agement, NMEA 2000 Alarms, Waypoint Sharing and Backlight Syn-

chronization.

2. Highlight BUS SETUP and press ENT, which will open the Bus Configu-

ration menu. A list of network devices will be at the top of the page.

3. Use ↑ ↓ to select the desired engine interface and press ENT. The De-

vice Configuration menu will appear.

4. Highlight ENGINE TYPE and press ENT, which will open the Engine

Type menu with the following options: DF40, DF50, DF60, DF70,

DF90/115, DF140, DF150, DF175, DF200/225, DF250 and DF300.

218

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5. Select your engine type and press ENT. The following message will

appear: Are you sure you wish to change this device's configuration?

6. Highlight YES and press ENT. Press EXIT repeatedly to get back to the

main display.

Advanced Options menu

The Engine Interface Advanced Options menu contains three catego-

ries: Instance, Restore Defaults and Reset Trim Calibration.

Instance

The Instance command is intended for use only by experienced NMEA

2000 network technicians. Instance allows network technicians to re-

solve certain electronic probe conflicts. This is most likely to occur if the

network includes LMF-200 or LMF-400 digital gauges, which support

the display of fewer electronic probes than your GPS or sonar/GPS unit.

If you want to use your unit in a network including one of these digital

gauges, you may need to consult customer service. You should never

need this command if you are connecting your unit to a network with

similar display units and/or a series of electronic probes.

Restore Defaults

The Restore Defaults command allows you to reset an individual en-

gine interface's settings to factory defaults. If, for example, you execute

the Restore Defaults command from your Port Engine Interface Ad-

vanced Options menu, only the settings for the Port Engine Interface

will be reset to factory defaults. Other engine interfaces on the network

will not be affected.

To restore default settings:

1. Press MENU| MENU, use ↑ ↓ to select NMEA 2000 and press ENT. The

NMEA 2000 menu will appear with five options: Bus Setup, Fuel Man-

agement, NMEA 2000 Alarms, Waypoint Sharing and Backlight Syn-

chronization.

2. Highlight BUS SETUP and press ENT.

3. Use ↑ ↓ to select the desired fluid level and press ENT. The Device

Configuration menu will appear.

4. Highlight ADVANCED OPTIONS and press ENT.

5. Select RESTORE DEFAULTS and press ENT. The following message will

appear: Are you sure you wish to change this device's configuration?

6. Highlight YES and press ENT. Press EXIT repeatedly to get back to the

main display.

219

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

NOTE:

The Suzuki Engine Interface Device Configuration menu contains

two Engine Trim calibration commands, which will be addressed in

the next segment of this section, Calibrating EP Sensors.

Calibrating EP Sensors

The factory calibration settings for the EP-10 Fuel Flow, EP-15 Fluid

Level and Suzuki Engine Interface should be adequate for the majority

of applications, so calibration will not be necessary in most cases.

EP-10 Fuel Flow Calibration

The default calibration for the EP-10 Fuel Flow is adequate in most

cases, but if Fuel Used readings are off by more than 3 percent, calibra-

tion is recommended.

To check fuel flow accuracy:

Select Fuel Used to be shown as Overlay Data on your unit's main dis-

play. Refer to the Overlay Data segment of this manual for instructions

on how to select Fuel Used data as Overlay Data.

1. After selecting Fuel Used as overlay data, fill up your tank and press

MENU|MENU.

2. Select NMEA 2000 and press ENT.

3. Highlight FUEL MANAGEMENT and press ENT. Select TANK LOCATION and

press ENT.

4. Use ↑ ↓ to select the location (Port, Center or Starboard) of the fuel

flow you want to calibrate and press ENT.

5. Highlight FILL TANK and press ENT. The following confirmation mes-

sage will appear: Are you sure you wish to Fill Tank?

6. Select YES and press ENT. The following confirmation message will

appear: Do you wish to re-calibrate the device?

7. Highlight NO and press ENT.

8. Take your vessel out on the water and burn at least five gallons of

fuel. Be sure you run only ONE engine — the engine connected

to your fuel flow.

9. Fill up your tank again, noting how much fuel you added to the tank.

Compare that number to the Fuel Used figure displayed on the page

you customized. If the amount of fuel you added to the tank and the

fuel used figure are off by more than 3 percent, we recommend the fuel

flow be calibrated.

NOTE:

You must use the gauge's Fill Tank command when filling your fuel

tank to keep the fuel flow updated with correct information on the

amount of fuel in the tank.

220

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To calibrate an EP-10 Fuel Flow:

10. If calibration is necessary, press MENU|MENU, select NMEA 2000 and

press ENT.

11. Highlight FUEL MANAGEMENT and press ENT.

12. Select TANK LOCATION and press ENT to choose the location of the tank

connected to selected fuel flow. Press ENT.

13. Highlight FILL TANK and press ENT. The following message will ap-

pear: Are you sure you wish to Fill Tank? Select YES and press ENT.

14. The following message will appear: Do you wish to re-calibrate the

device? Select YES and press ENT.

15. Repeat these steps for each EP-10 Fuel Flow you want to calibrate.

To Reset Calibration:

1. Press MENU|MENU, select NMEA 2000 and press ENT.

2. Highlight FUEL MANAGEMENT and press ENT.

3. Highlight ENGINE SELECT and press ENT. The Engine Select menu will

appear with up to four options: All Engines, Port, Center and Star-

board. Selecting All Engines will reset calibration for all engines back

to factory defaults.

4. Select All Engines or the engine connected to the desired device and

press ENT.

5. Highlight RESET CALIBRATION and press ENT. The following message

will appear: Are you sure you wish to Reset Calibration?

6. Highlight YES and press ENT. Press EXIT repeatedly to get back to the

main display.

EP-15 Fluid Level Calibration

The default calibration for the EP-15 Fluid Level is just as accurate as

standard fluid level gauges. If, however, the tank has an irregular

shape or greater accuracy is needed, calibration is recommended. There

are three calibration options: 2-Point, 3-Point and 5-Point.

2-Point Calibration

A 2-point calibration is best suited for rectangular or square-shaped

tanks, where the capacity of the top half of the tank matches the capac-

ity in the lower half of the tank. In a two-point calibration, you will set

two points, one each for empty and full levels. You can begin calibra-

tion at either of the two points, but we recommend starting with an

empty tank. You will fill the tank to complete calibration.

1. Press MENU| MENU, use ↓ ↑ to select NMEA 2000 and press ENT.

2. Highlight BUS SETUP and press ENT, which will open the Bus Configu-

ration menu. A list of network devices will be at the top of the page.

221

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3. Select the EP-15 Fluid Level and press ENT.

4. Press ↓ to select CALIBRATE and press ENT. The Device Calibration

menu will appear. Instructions on Calibration will be listed at the top

of the menu.

5. Highlight NUM PTS, press ENT and select 2. Press ENT.

6. Select FLUID LEVEL, press ENT, then select EMPTY LEVEL and press ENT.

7. Make sure the fuel tank is empty, highlight CALIBRATE and press ENT.

The following message will appear: Empty Level Calibration Com-

pleted. Press ENT.

8. Fill up your tank, highlight FLUID LEVEL and press ENT.

9. Select FULL LEVEL and press ENT. Highlight CALIBRATE and press ENT.

10. The following message will appear: Full level Calibration Com-

pleted. Press ENT, then press EXIT repeatedly to get back to the main

display.

Calibrate is highlighted on the device configuration menu (left). Cali-

bration menu (right) with calibration instructions listed at the top.

3-Point Calibration

3-point calibration is designed for tanks that vary in shape from the top

to the bottom. You can begin calibration at any point in the 3-point

process, but we recommend starting calibration with an empty tank.

In a 3-point calibration, you will set three points, one each for empty,

half and full levels.

1. Press MENU| MENU, use ↓ ↑ to select NMEA 2000 and press ENT.

2. Highlight BUS SETUP and press ENT, which will open the Bus Configu-

ration menu. A list of network devices will be at the top of the page. 3.

Select the EP-15 Fluid Level and press ENT.

222

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4. Press ↓ to select CALIBRATE and press ENT. The Device Calibration

menu will appear.

5. Highlight NUM PTS, press ENT and select 3. Press ENT.

6. Make sure your tank is empty, then highlight FLUID LEVEL and press

ENT. Select EMPTY LEVEL and press ENT.

7. Select CALIBRATE and press ENT. The following message will appear:

Empty Level Calibration Completed. Press ENTER.

8. Add half a tank of fuel, highlight FLUID LEVEL and press ENT. Select

HALF LEVEL and press ENT.

9. Select CALIBRATE and press ENT. The following message will appear:

Half Level Calibration Completed. Press ENT.

10. Fill up the tank, then highlight FLUID LEVEL and press ENT. Select

FULL LEVEL and press ENT.

11. Highlight CALIBRATE and press ENT. The following message will ap-

pear: Full Level Calibration Completed. Press ENT, then press EXIT re-

peatedly to get back to the main display.

Num Pts menu with 5-point calibration selected (left). Half level selected on

Fluid Level menu (center). Calibration Done window (right).

5-Point Calibration

5-point calibration is best suited tanks that vary greatly in shape from

top to bottom. You can begin calibration at any point in the 5-point cali-

bration process. We recommend starting calibration with an empty

tank. In a five-point calibration you will set five points: Empty Level, 1

Qtr Level, Half Level, 3 Qtr Level and Full Level.

In a 5-point calibration, you will have four calibration points left after

calibrating your tank's Empty Level. To figure out how much fuel you

should add for the remaining steps of the calibration process, divide the

total capacity of you tank by four. So, if you have a 40-gallon tank, each

quarter tank will equate to 10 gallons.

1. Press MENU| MENU, use ↓ ↑ to select NMEA 2000 and press ENT.

2. Highlight BUS SETUP and press ENT, which will open the Bus Configu-

223

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ration menu. A list of network devices will be at the top of the page.

3. Select the desired EP-15 Fluid Level and press ENT.

4. Press ↓ to select CALIBRATE and press ENT. The Device Calibration

menu will appear.

5. Highlight NUM PTS, press ENT and select 5. Press ENT.

6. Make sure your tank is empty, then highlight FLUID LEVEL and press

ENT. Select EMPTY LEVEL and press ENT.

7. Select CALIBRATE and press ENT. The following message will appear:

Empty Level Calibration Completed. Press ENT.

8. Add 1 quarter tank of fuel, highlight FLUID LEVEL and press ENT. Select

1 QTR LEVEL and press ENT.

9. Select CALIBRATE and press ENT. The following message will appear: 1

Qtr Level Calibration Completed. Press ENT.

10. Add another quarter tank of fuel, which should raise the fuel level

to half a tank. Highlight FLUID LEVEL and press ENT. Select HALF LEVEL and

press ENT.

11. Highlight CALIBRATE and press ENT. The following message will ap-

pear: Half Level Calibration Completed. Press ENT.

12. Add another quarter tank of fuel, which should raise the fuel level

to 3 quarters of a tank. Highlight FLUID LEVEL and press ENT. Select 3 QTR

LEVEL and press ENT.

13. Select CALIBRATE and press ENT. The following message will appear: 3

Qtr Level Calibration Completed. Press ENT.

14. Top off the tank, highlight FLUID LEVEL and press ENT. Select FULL

LEVEL and press ENT.

15. Select CALIBRATE and press ENT. The following message will appear:

Full Level Calibration Completed. Press ENT, then press EXIT repeat-

edly to get back to the main display.

Fuel Flow Calibration in a Suzuki Engine Interface

The default calibration for the Suzuki Engine Interface is adequate in

most cases, but if Fuel Used readings are off by more than 3 percent,

calibration is recommended.

To check engine interface accuracy:

Select Fuel Used to be shown as Overlay Data on your unit's main dis-

play. Refer to the Overlay Data segment of this manual for instructions

on how to select Fuel Used data as Overlay Data.

1. After selecting Fuel Used as overlay data, fill up your tank and press

MENU|MENU.

2. Select NMEA 2000 and press ENT.

224

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3. Highlight FUEL MANAGEMENT and press ENT. Select TANK LOCATION and

press ENT.

4. Use ↑ ↓ to select the location (Port, Center or Starboard) of the en-

gine interface you want to calibrate and press ENT.

5. Highlight FILL TANK and press ENT. The following confirmation mes-

sage will appear: Are you sure you wish to Fill Tank?

6. Select YES and press ENTER. The following confirmation message will

appear: Do you wish to re-calibrate the device?

7. Highlight NO and press ENT. Take your vessel out on the water and

burn at least five gallons of fuel. Be sure you run only ONE engine

— the engine connected to your engine interface.

9. Fill up your tank again, noting how much fuel you added to the tank.

Compare that number to the Fuel Used figure displayed on the page

you customized. If the amount of fuel you added to the tank and the

fuel used figure are off by more than 3 percent, we recommend the en-

gine interface be calibrated.

NOTE:

You must use the gauge's Fill Tank command when filling your fuel

tank to keep the engine interface updated with correct information

on the amount of fuel in the tank.

To calibrate a Suzuki Engine Interface:

10. If calibration is necessary, press MENU|MENU, select NMEA 2000 and

press ENT.

11. Highlight FUEL MANAGEMENT and press ENT.

12. Select TANK LOCATION and press ENT to choose the location of the tank

connected to the selected engine interface. Press ENT.

13. Highlight FILL TANK and press ENT. The following message will ap-

pear: Are you sure you wish to Fill Tank? Select YES and press ENT.

14. The following message will appear: Do you wish to re-calibrate the

device? Select YES and press ENT.

15. Repeat these steps for each engine interface you want to calibrate.

Engine Trim Calibration

Engine Trim is calibrated through the Suzuki Engine Interface Device

Configuration menu.

1. Press MENU|MENU, select NMEA 2000 and press ENT.

2. Choose BUS SETUP and press ENTER. Select the Suzuki Engine Inter-

face connected to the desired engine and press ENT.

3. Highlight CALIBRATE TRIM and press ENT. The Device Calibration win-

dow will appear with a list of Calibration Instructions.

4. Highlight START CALIBRATION and press ENT. The following message

will appear: Please fully raise the Engine Trim.

225

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5. After engine trim has been fully raised, press ENT. The following

message will appear: Please fully lower the Engine trim.

6. After engine trim has been fully lowered, press ENT. A Calibration

Completed message will appear. Press ENT.

7. Repeat these instructions to adjust the engine trim for each engine

connected to a Suzuki Engine Interface. Press EXIT repeatedly to return

to the main display.

Reset Trim Calibration

If you are not satisfied with your engine trim calibration, you can reset

engine trim calibration from the Suzuki Engine Interface Advanced

Options menu.

1. Press MENU|MENU, select NMEA 2000 and press ENT.

2. Choose BUS SETUP and press ENT. Select the Suzuki Engine Interface

connected to the desired engine and press ENT.

3. Highlight ADVANCED OPTIONS and press ENT. Select Reset TRIM CALIBRA-

^TIONand press ENT. The following message will appear: Do you wish to

re-calibrate the device?

4. Highlight YES and press ENT. Press EXIT repeatedly to get back to the

main display.

Bennett Trim Tabs Calibration

Trim Tabs will be calibrated through their Device Configuration menu.

To calibrate Trim Tabs:

1. Press MENU|MENU, select BUS SETUP and press ENT. A list of network

devices will appear.

2. Select BENNETT TRIM TABS from the list and press ENT, which will open

the Trim Tab Device Configuration menu.

3. Highlight CALIBRATE and press ENT. The Device Calibration window

will appear with a list of calibration instructions.

4. Select START CALIBRATION and press ENT. The following message will

appear: Please fully raise Trim Tabs.

5. After fully raising the trims tabs, press ENT. The following message

will appear: Please fully lower trim tabs.

6. After fully lowering the trim tabs, press ENT. A Calibration Complete

message will appear. Press ENT. Press EXIT repeatedly to return to the

main display.

226

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Reset Calibration highlighted (left). Reset Calibration confirmation

window (right).

To Reset Calibration:

1. Press MENU|MENU, select NMEA 2000 and press ENT.

2. Highlight FUEL MANAGEMENT and press ENT.

3. Highlight ENGINE SELECT and press ENT. The Engine Select menu will

appear with up to four options: All Engines, Port, Center and Star-

board. Selecting All Engines will reset calibration for all engines back

to factory defaults.

4. Select All Engines or the engine connected to the desired device and

press ENT.

5. Highlight RESET CALIBRATION and press ENT. The following message

will appear: Are you sure you wish to Reset Calibration?

6. Highlight YES and press ENT. Press EXIT repeatedly to get back to the

main display.

227

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Notes

228

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Section 11: Supplemental Material

Datums Used by This Unit

WGS 1984

Default

Zaire, Zambia and

Zimbabwe

Australian Geodetic

1984 - Australia &

Tasmania

Adindan

Mean for Ethiopia,

Sudan

Arc 1950 - Botswana

Arc 1950 - Burundi

Arc 1950 - Lesotho

Arc 1950 - Malawi

Arc 1950 - Swaziland

Arc 1950 - Zaire

Ayabelle Lighthouse -

Djibouti

Adindan

Burkina Faso

Bellevue (IGN) - Efa-

te & Erromango I-

slands

Adindan

Cameroon

Bermuda 1957 -

Bermuda

Adindan

Ethiopia

Bissau - Guinea-

Bissau

Bogota Observatory -

Colombia

Arc 1950 - Zambia

Arc 1950 - Zimbabwe

Adindan

Mali

Adindan

Senegal

Arc 1960 - Mean for

Kenya, Tanzania

Bukit Rimpah - Indo-

nesia (Bangka & Beli-

tung Islands)

Adindan

Sudan

Ascension Island

1958 - Ascension

Island

Camp Area Astro -

Antarctica (McMurdo

Camp Area)

Afgooye

Somalia

Astro Beacon E 1945

- Iwo Jima

Campo Inchauspe -

Argentina

Ain el Abd 1970

Bahrain

Astro DOS 71/4 - St.

Helena Island

Canton Astro 1966 -

Phoenix Islands

Ain el Abd 1970

Saudi Arabia

Astro Tern Island

(FRIG) 1961 - Tern

Island

Cape - South Africa

Anna 1 Astro 1965

Cocos Islands

Cape Canaveral -

Bahamas, Florida

Astronomical Station

1952 - Marcus Island

Antigua Island Astro

1943; Antigua (Lee-

ward Islands)

Carthage - Tunisia

Switzerland

Australian Geodetic

1966 - Australia &

Tasmania

Arc 1950; Mean for

Botswana, Lesotho,

Malawi, Swaziland,

Chatham Island Astro

1971; New Zealand

(Chatham Island)

229

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

European 1950

England, Channel

Islands, Ireland,

Scotland, Shetland

Islands

L.C. 5 Astro 1961

Cayman Brac Island

Chua Astro

Paraguay

Leigon

Ghana

Corrego Alegre

Brazil

European 1950

Finland, Norway

Liberia 1964

Liberia

Dabola

Guinea

European 1950

Greece

Luzon

Philippines (Exclud-

ing Mindanao)

Djakarta (Batavia)

Indonesia (Sumatra)

European 1950

Iran

DOS 1968

Luzon

New Georgia Islands

(Gizo Island)

Philippines (Min-

danao)

European 1950

Italy (Sardinia)

Easter Island 1967

Easter Island

Mahe 1971

Mahe Island

European 1950

(Sicily)

European 1950

Malta

Massawa

Ethiopia (Eritrea)

Mean for Austria,

Belgium, Denmark,

Finland, France,

West Germany, Gi-

braltar, Greece, Italy,

Luxembourg, Nether-

lands, Norway, Por-

tugal, Spain, Swe-

den, Switzerland

Ireland 1965

Ireland

Merchich

Morocco

ISTS 061 Astro 1968

South Georgia Is-

lands

Midway Astro 1961

Midway Islands

Minna

ISTS 073 Astro 1969

Diego Garcia

Cameroon

European 1950

Mean for Austria,

Denmark, France,

West Germany,

Netherlands, Switzer-

land

Minna

Nigeria

Johnston Island 1961

Johnston Island

Montserrat Island

Astro 1958; Montser-

rat (Leeward Islands)

Kandawala

Sri Lanka

European 1950

Mean for Iraq, Israel,

Jordan, Lebanon,

Kuwait, Saudi Arabia,

Syria

Kerguelen Island

1949

Kerguelen Island

M’Poraloko

Gabon, Nahrwan,

Oman (Masirah Is-

land)

Kertau 1948

West Malaysia &

Singapore

European 1950

Cyprus

Nahrwan

Saudi Arabia

European 1950

Egypt

Kusaie Astro 1951

Caroline Islands

Nahrwan

United Arab Emirates

230

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Naparima BWI

Trinidad & Tobago

North American 1927

Canada (Alberta,

British Columbia)

Old Hawaiian

Mean for Hawaii,

Kauai, Maui, Oahu

North American 1927

Mean for Antigua,

Barbados, Barbuda,

Caicos Islands,

North American 1927

Canada (Manitoba,

Ontario)

Old Hawaiian

Hawaii

Cuba, Dominican

Republic, Grand

Cayman, Jamaica,

Turks Islands

Old Hawaiian

Kauai

North American 1927

Canada (New

Brunswick, New-

foundland, Nova Sco-

tia, Quebec)

Old Hawaiian

Maui

North American 1927

Mean for Belize, Cos-

ta Rica, El Salvador,

Guatemala, Hondu-

ras, Nicaragua

Old Hawaiian

Oahu

North American 1927

Canada (Northwest

Territories, Sas-

katchewan)

Oman

North American 1927

Mean for Canada

North American 1927

Canada (Yukon)

Ordinance Survey

Great Britain 1936 -

Mean for England,

Isle of Man, Scotland,

Shetland Islands,

Wales

North American 1927

Mean for CONUS

(Continental United

States)

North American 1927

Canal Zone

North American 1927

Mean for CONUS

(East of Mississippi

River) including Lou-

isiana, Missouri, Min-

nesota

North American 1927

Cuba

Ordinance Survey

Great Britain 1936 -

England

North American 1927

Greenland (Hayes

Peninsula)

Ordinance Survey

Great Britain 1936 -

England, Isle of Man,

Wales

North American 1927

Mean for CONUS

(West of Mississippi

River)

North American 1927

Mexico

North American 1983

Alaska, Canada,

CONUS

Ordinance Survey

Great Britain 1936 -

Scotland, Shetland

Islands

North American 1927

Alaska

North American 1983

Central America,

Mexico

North American 1927

Bahamas (Except

San Salvador Island)

Ordinance Survey

Great Britain 1936 -

Wales

Observaorio Metereo

1939; Azores (Corvo

& Flores Islands)

North American 1927

Bahamas (San Sal-

vador Island)

Pico de las Nieves

Canary Islands

Old Egyptian 1907

Egypt

Pitcairn Astro 1967

Pitcairn Island

231

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Point 58

Sweden

Tokyo

Mean for Japan, Ko-

rea, Okinawa

South American 1969

Chile

Santo (DOS)

1965 Espirito Santo

Island

South American 1969

Colombia

Tokyo

Japan

South American 1969

Ecuador

Tokyo

Korea

Sao Braz

Azores (Sao Miguel,

Santa Maria Islands)

South American 1969

Ecuador (Baltra, Ga-

lapagos)

Tokyo

Sapper Hill 1943

Okinawa

East Falkland Island

South American 1969

Guyana

Tristan Astro 1968

Tristan da Cunha

Schwarzeck

Nambia

South American 1969

Paraguay

South American 1969

Peru

Viti Levu 1916

Fiji (Viti Levu Island)

Selvagem Grande

Salvage Islands

Wake

SGS 85

Soviet Geodetic Sys-

tem 1985

South American 1969

Trinidad & Tobago

Eniwetok 1960

Marshall Islands

South American 1969

Mean for Argentina,

Bolivia, Brazil, Chile,

Colombia, Ecuador,

Guyana, Paraguay,

Peru, Trinidad & To-

bago, and Venezuela

South American 1969

Venezuela

Wake Island Astro

1952

Wake Atoll

South Asia

Singapore

WGS 1972

Global Definition

Tananarive Observa-

tory 1925; Madagas-

car

South American 1969

Argentina

Yacare

Uruguay

South American 1969

Bolivia

Timbalai 1948

Brunei, East Malaysia

(Sabah, Sarawak)

Zanderij

Suriname

South American 1969

Brazil

232

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Notes

233

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Notes

234

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Notes

235

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FCC Compliance

This device complies with Part 15 of the U.S. Federal Communi-

cations Commission (FCC) Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful in-

terference, and (2) this device must accept any interference re-

ceived, including interference that may cause undesired opera-

tion.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manu-

facturer could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

Note:

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the

limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable pro-

tection against harmful interference in a residential installation.

This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency

energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the in-

structions, may cause harmful interference to radio communica-

tions. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not

occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause

harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can

be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is

encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of

the following measures:

•

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different

from that to which the receiver is connected.

•

Consult the factory customer service department for help.

236

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

LOWRANCE DATABASES LICENSE AGREEMENT

THIS IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN THE END-USER WHO FIRST

PURCHASES THIS PRODUCT AS A CONSUMER ITEM FOR PERSONAL,

FAMILY, OR HOUSEHOLD USE ("YOU") AND LOWRANCE ELECTRONICS,

INC., THE MANUFACTURER OF THIS PRODUCT ("WE", "OUR", OR "US").

USING THE PRODUCT ACCOMPANIED BY THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT

CONSTITUTES ACCEPTANCE OF THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS. IF

YOU DO NOT ACCEPT ALL TERMS AND CONDITIONS, PROMPTLY RE-

TURN THE PRODUCT WITHIN 30 DAYS OF PURCHASE. PLEASE RE-

TURN USING THE ENCLOSED UPS SHIPPING LABEL AND INCLUDE:

PROOF OF PURCHASE, NAME, ADDRESS, AND PHONE NUMBER. YOUR

PURCHASE PRICE AND ANY APPLICABLE TAXES WILL BE REFUNDED.

PLEASE ALLOW 4-6 WEEKS TO PROCESS YOUR REFUND.

1. This License Agreement applies to the one or more databases that

your product may contain. We refer to these singly as a "Database"

and together as the "Databases." Your product may thus include the

"WBS Database" which contains worldwide background surface

mapping data, the "SmartMap Database" which contains inland

mapping data, or other Databases.

2. The Databases that your product may contain are licensed, not sold.

We grant to you the nonexclusive, nonassignable right to use these

Databases for supplemental navigation reference purposes, but only

as long as you comply with the terms and conditions of this License

Agreement. We reserve the right to terminate this license if you vio-

late any aspect of this License Agreement. You are responsible for

using official government charts and prudent navigation for safe

travel.

3. The Databases housed in your product are protected by the copy-

right notices appearing on the product or its screen(s). You may

NOT modify, adapt, translate, reverse engineer, decompile, disas-

semble, rent, lease, or resell any Database, and you may NOT create

derivative works based upon any Database or its contents. Any un-

authorized reproduction, use, or transfer of a Database may be a

crime and may subject you to damages and attorney fees.

4. This License Agreement will terminate immediately without prior

notice from us if you fail to comply with or violate any of the provi-

sions of this Agreement. Upon termination, you will promptly return

all products containing one or more Databases to us.

5. Prices and programs are subject to change without notice.

6. This License Agreement shall be governed by the laws of the State

of Oklahoma and comprises the complete and exclusive understand-

ing between you and us concerning the above subject matter.

237

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

DATABASES LIMITED WARRANTY

"We", "our", or "us" refers to Lowrance Electronics, Inc., the manufacturer of

this product. "You" or "your" refers to the first person who purchases the prod-

uct as a consumer item for personal, family, or household use. The Databases

Limited Warranty applies to the one or more databases that your product may

contain. We refer to each of these as a "Database" or together as the "Data-

bases." Your product may thus include the "WBS Database" which contains

worldwide background surface mapping data, the "SmartMap Database" which

contains inland mapping data, or other Databases.

We warrant to you that we have accurately compiled, processed, and repro-

duced the portions of the source material on which the Databases are based.

However, we are under no obligation to provide updates to the Databases, and

the data contained in the Databases may be incomplete when compared to the

source material. WE MAKE NO EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF

ANY KIND ABOUT THE ACCURACY OF THE SOURCE MATERIAL ITSELF,

INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MER-

CHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

If there is a defect in any Database, your exclusive remedy shall be, at our op-

tion, either a refund of the price you paid for the product containing the defec-

tive Database or a replacement of such product. WE WILL NOT UNDER ANY

CIRCUMSTANCES BE LIABLE TO ANYONE FOR ANY SPECIAL, CONSE-

QUENTIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR OTHER INDIRECT DAMAGE OF ANY

KIND.

Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequen-

tial damages, so the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you.

This warranty does NOT apply in the following circumstances: (1) when the

product has been serviced or repaired by anyone other than us; (2) when the

product has been connected, installed, combined, altered, adjusted, or handled

in a manner other than according to the instructions furnished with the prod-

uct; (3) when any serial number has been effaced, altered, or removed; or (4)

when any defect, problem, loss, or damage has resulted from any accident, mis-

use, negligence, or carelessness, or from any failure to provide reasonable and

necessary maintenance in accordance with the instructions of the owner’s man-

ual for the product.

We reserve the right to make changes or improvements in our products from

time to time without incurring the obligation to install such improvements or

changes on equipment or items previously manufactured.

This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other

rights which may vary from state to state.

Your remedies under this warranty will be available so long as you can show in

a reasonable manner that the defect occurred within one (1) year from the date

of your original purchase, and we must receive your warranty claim no later

than 30 days after such 1-year period expires. Your claim must be substanti-

ated by a dated sales receipt or sales slip.

238

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

LOWRANCE ELECTRONICS

FULL ONE-YEAR WARRANTY

"We," "our," or "us" refers to LOWRANCE ELECTRONICS, INC., the manufacturer of

this product. "You" or "your" refers to the first person who purchases this product as a

consumer item for personal, family or household use.

We warrant this product against defects or malfunctions in materials and workmanship,

and against failure to conform to this product's written specifications, all for one (1) year

from the date of original purchase by you. WE MAKE NO OTHER EXPRESS WAR-

RANTY OR REPRESENTATION OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER CONCERNING THIS

PRODUCT. Your remedies under this warranty will be available so long as you can show

in a reasonable manner that any defect or malfunction in materials or workmanship, or

any non-conformity with the product's written specifications, occurred within one year

from the date of your original purchase, which must be substantiated by a dated sales

receipt or sales slip. Any such defect, malfunction, or non-conformity which occurs within

one year from your original purchase date will either be repaired without charge or be

replaced with a new product identical or reasonably equivalent to this product, at our

option, within a reasonable time after our receipt of the product. If such defect, malfunc-

tion, or non-conformity remains after a reasonable number of attempts to repair by us,

you may elect to obtain without charge a replacement of the product or a refund for the

product. THIS REPAIR, OR REPLACEMENT OR REFUND (AS JUST DESCRIBED) IS

THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDY AVAILABLE TO YOU AGAINST US FOR ANY DEFECT,

MALFUNCTION, OR NON-CONFORMITY CONCERNING THE PRODUCT OR FOR

ANY LOSS OR DAMAGE RESULTING FROM ANY OTHER CAUSE WHATSOEVER.

WE WILL NOT UNDER ANY CIRCUMSTANCES BE LIABLE TO ANYONE FOR ANY

SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR OTHER INDIRECT DAMAGE OF

ANY KIND.

Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential dam-

ages, so the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you.

This warranty does NOT apply in the following circumstances: (1) when the product has

been serviced or repaired by anyone other than us; (2) when the product has been con-

nected, installed, combined, altered, adjusted, or handled in a manner other than accord-

ing to the instructions furnished with the product; (3) when any serial number has been

effaced, altered, or removed; or (4) when any defect, problem, loss, or damage has resulted

from any accident, misuse, negligence, or carelessness, or from any failure to provide

reasonable and necessary maintenance in accordance with the instructions of the owner's

manual for the product.

We reserve the right to make changes or improvements in our products from time to time

without incurring the obligation to install such improvements or changes on equipment or

items previously manufactured.

This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rights which

may vary from state to state.

REMINDER: You must retain the sales slip or sales receipt proving the date of your

original purchase in case warranty service is ever required.

LOWRANCE ELECTRONICS

12000 E. SKELLY DRIVE, TULSA, OK 74128

(800) 324-1356

239

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

How to Obtain Service…

…in the USA:

We back your investment in quality products with quick, expert service

and genuine Lowrance parts. If you're in the United States and you

have technical, return or repair questions, please contact the Factory

Customer Service Department. Before any product can be returned,

you must call customer service to determine if a return is necessary.

Many times, customer service can resolve your problem over the phone

without sending your product to the factory. To call us, use the follow-

ing toll-free number:

800-324-1356

8 a.m. to 5 p.m. Central Standard Time, M-F

Lowrance Electronics may find it necessary to change or end our ship-

ping policies, regulations, and special offers at any time. We reserve the

right to do so without notice.

…in Canada:

If you're in Canada and you have technical, return or repair questions,

please contact the Factory Customer Service Department. Before any

product can be returned, you must call customer service to determine if

a return is necessary. Many times, customer service can resolve your

problem over the phone without sending your product to the factory. To

call us, use the following toll-free number:

800-661-3983

905-629-1614 (not toll-free)

8 a.m. to 5 p.m. Eastern Standard Time, M-F

…outside Canada and the USA:

If you have technical, return or repair questions, contact the dealer in

the country where you purchased your unit. To locate a dealer near

you, visit our web site, www.lowrance.com and look for the Dealer Loca-

tor.

240

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Accessory Ordering Information

for all countries

To order Lowrance GPS accessories such as power cables or MMC

cards, please contact:

1) Your local marine dealer, sporting goods or consumer electronics

store. Most quality dealers that handle marine electronic equipment or

other consumer electronics should be able to assist you with these

items.

To locate

Lowrance dealer near you, visit our web site,

www.lowrance.com and click on Support and then click Dealer Locator.

Or, you can consult your telephone directory for listings.

2) U.S. customers: LEI Extras Inc., PO Box 129, Catoosa, OK 74015-0129

Call 1-800-324-0045 or visit our web site www.lei-extras.com.

3) Canadian customers can write:

Lowrance/Eagle Canada, 919 Matheson Blvd. E. Mississauga, Ontario

L4W2R7 or fax 905-629-3118.

Shipping Information

If it becomes necessary to send a product for repair or replacement, you

must first receive a return authorization number from Customer

Service. Products shipped without a return authorization will not be

accepted. When shipping, we recommend you do the following:

1. Please do not ship knobs or mounting brackets with gimbal units.

2. If your unit saves sonar logs or GPS data files to memory cards,

make sure you have saved the data to a memory card and that the card

has been removed from the unit, otherwise your data will be lost.

3. If you are sending a check for repair, please place your check in an

envelope and tape it to the unit.

4. For proper testing, include a brief note with the product describing

the problem. Be sure to include your name, return shipping address

and a daytime telephone number. An e-mail address is optional but

useful.

5. Pack the unit in a suitable size box with packing material to prevent

any damage during shipping.

6. Write the Return Authorization (RA) number on the outside of the

box underneath your return address.

7. For your security, you may want to insure the package through your

shipping courier. Lowrance does not assume responsibility for goods

lost or damaged in transit.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Visit our web site:

Lowrance Pub. 988-0152-181

Printed in USA 120406

Lowrance Electronics, Inc.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

KTM Motorcycle 125 User Manual
Lathem Time Clock LTR RSS User Manual
Learning Resources Games LER 5057 User Manual
Lexmark Photo Printer P915 User Manual
LG Electronics DVD Player BP730 User Manual
Lincoln Electric Welder 450WC User Manual
Lindy Network Card 70918 User Manual
Maxtor Computer Drive 1TB User Manual
Metabo Welding System Welding Technology User Manual
Metrologic Instruments Scanner MS2400 User Manual